From 39dc5cdbdf0c89c978293f541900e89a11db8de9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Fri, 24 Nov 2017 23:43:17 +0000 Subject: glossaries-extra (24nov17) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@45898 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES | 20 + .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README | 4 +- .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf | Bin 1064005 -> 1069684 bytes .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html | 7918 ++++++++++---------- .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.pdf | Bin 833085 -> 844831 bytes .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.tex | 235 +- .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf | Bin 512874 -> 512950 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf | Bin 44749 -> 44749 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf | Bin 80745 -> 80745 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf | Bin 50358 -> 50358 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf | Bin 36734 -> 36734 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf | Bin 43863 -> 43863 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf | Bin 35296 -> 35296 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf | Bin 91049 -> 91049 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf | Bin 69519 -> 69519 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf | Bin 54855 -> 54855 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf | Bin 141941 -> 141941 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf | Bin 161382 -> 161378 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf | Bin 41281 -> 41281 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf | Bin 41603 -> 41603 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf | Bin 45245 -> 45245 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf | Bin 54610 -> 54610 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf | Bin 55773 -> 55773 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf | Bin 75114 -> 75114 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf | Bin 63220 -> 63220 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf | Bin 125899 -> 125899 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf | Bin 42711 -> 42711 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf | Bin 81603 -> 81603 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf | Bin 57809 -> 57809 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf | Bin 45141 -> 45141 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf | Bin 159822 -> 159823 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf | Bin 202082 -> 202082 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf | Bin 67724 -> 67724 bytes .../sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf | Bin 47572 -> 47572 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf | Bin 44514 -> 44514 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf | Bin 106058 -> 106058 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf | Bin 19861 -> 19863 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf | Bin 43469 -> 43469 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf | Bin 38788 -> 38788 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf | Bin 37047 -> 37047 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf | Bin 67878 -> 67878 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf | Bin 33107 -> 33107 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex | 7 + .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf | Bin 48035 -> 48035 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf | Bin 47883 -> 47883 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf | Bin 34931 -> 34931 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf | Bin 46388 -> 46388 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf | Bin 31596 -> 31596 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf | Bin 13411 -> 13411 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf | Bin 49443 -> 49443 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf | Bin 33219 -> 33219 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf | Bin 61040 -> 61040 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf | Bin 45734 -> 45734 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx | 241 +- .../latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins | 2 +- .../glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty | 2 +- .../latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty | 135 +- .../latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty | 15 +- 58 files changed, 4657 insertions(+), 3922 deletions(-) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES index 6f5adb127be..4a7a6dd3b77 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES @@ -1,3 +1,23 @@ +1.25 (2017-11-24) + + * glossaries-extra.sty: + + - added: \glsxtronlyname, \glsxtrlongshortname, + \glsxtrshortlongname, \glsxtrfootnotename, + \glsxtrshortnolongname, \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname, + \glsxtrlongnoshortname, \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname, + \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname + + - added \glsextrapostnamehook + + - \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse and + \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse now use \glsxtrparen instead + of hard-coded parentheses. + + * glossary-bookindex.sty: + + - added \glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv + 1.24 (2017-11-14): * glossaries-extra-manual.tex: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README index 1f4500a23d8..a4348edcb70 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.24 +LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.25 -Last Modified : 2017-11-14 +Last Modified : 2017-11-24 Author : Nicola Talbot diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf index 5531cd22850..c9ec4c00187 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html index 38abb131d55..be887f8b5f3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ a span.HoLogo-TeX span.HoLogo-e{text-decoration:none;} >

glossaries-extra.sty v1.24: an extension to the +class="cmr-17">glossaries-extra.sty v1.25: an extension to the glossaries package

@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ href="http://www.dickimaw-books.com/" class="url" >http://www.dickimaw-books.com/

2017-11-14

+class="cmr-12">2017-11-24

@@ -5040,16 +5040,37 @@ class="cmtt-10">\begin{multicols} {n}. -

Each top-level entry is displayed using -


}. You can switch from multicols to multicols* by redefining +


\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv  \glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv

+

+For example + + + +

+
+\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols*} +
+

+

Each top-level entry is displayed using +


\glsxtrbookindexname  \glsxtrbookindexname{label}

-

+

where the entry is identified by ⟨label⟩. This just does \glossentryname{ -

+
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexname}[1]{%  
 \glossentryname{#1}%  
 \ifglshassymbol{#1}{\space (\glossentrysymbol{#1})}{}%  
}
-

Alternatively you can use the

Alternatively you can use the \glsxtrpostnamecategory⟩ hook. -

Sub-entries are displayed using -


Sub-entries are displayed using +


\glsxtrbookindexsubname  \glsxtrbookindexsubname{label}

-

+

which just defaults to \glsxtrbookindexname{label}. -

The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given +

The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given by -



\glsxtrbookindexprelocation  \glsxtrbookindexprelocation{label}

-

+

where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. This checks if the location field has been set. If it @@ -5101,90 +5122,90 @@ has, it does

-
+
,\glsxtrprelocation
-

otherwise it just does

otherwise it just does \glsxtrprelocation (which defaults to \space). If you’re not using bib2gls, the , the location field won’t be set. -

The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by -


field won’t be set. +

The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by +


\glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation  \glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation{label}

-

+

which defaults to \glsxtrbookindexprelocation{label}. -

The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given +

The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given by -



\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep  \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep

-

+

This defaults to \nopagebreak. -

The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given +

The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given by -



\glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep  \glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep

-

+

This defaults to \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep. -

The separator between top-level entries is given by -


The separator between top-level entries is given by +


\glsxtrbookindexbetween  \glsxtrbookindexbetween{label1}{label2}

-

+

This comes after the entry given by ⟨label1⟩, if the entry has no children, or after the last descendent otherwise, so it always comes immediately before the entry given by ⟨label2⟩ unless the entry occurs at the start of a group. This does nothing by default. -

The separator between two level 1 entries is given by -


The separator between two level 1 entries is given by +


\glsxtrbookindexsubbetween  \glsxtrbookindexsubbetween{label1}{label2}

-

-

The separator between two level 2 entries is given by -


+

The separator between two level 2 entries is given by +


\glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween{label1} @@ -5192,12 +5213,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">} class="cmtt-10">{⟨label2}

-

+

At the end of each letter group, the following hooks are done in order: -



\glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup {}

-

-


+


\glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup{sub-label}

-

-


+


\glsxtrbookindexatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexatendgroup{label}

-

+

where ⟨sub-sub-label⟩ is the label of the last level 2 entry, ⟨sub-label⟩ is the label of the last level 1 entry and ⟨label⟩ is the label of the last level 0 entry. -

For example, the resource option

For example, the resource option seealso=omit instructs bib2gls to omit the + id="dx1-13032"> to omit the seealso cross-reference from the location list. (The see cross-reference will still be @@ -5247,7 +5268,7 @@ appended after the child entries using:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexatendgroup}[1]{%  
  \glsxtrifhasfield{seealso}{#1}{\glstreesubitem\glsxtruseseealso{#1}}{}%  
} @@ -5268,7 +5289,7 @@ appended after the child entries using:  
  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup{#1}%  
}
-

This uses

This uses \glstreesubitem and \glstreesubsubitem to indent the cross-reference according to the next level down, so the cross-reference for a top-level entry is aligned @@ -5276,45 +5297,45 @@ with the sub-entries, and a level 1 entry has its cross-reference aligned sub-sub-entries. In the event that a level 2 entry has a cross-reference, this is indented a bit further (but it won’t be aligned with any deeper level as the bookindex + id="dx1-13033"> style only supports a maximum of two sub-levels). -

The

The bookindex style uses group headings. (If you use style uses group headings. (If you use bib2gls remember to invoke + id="dx1-13036"> remember to invoke it with the --group or -g switch.) The heading will use -



\glsxtrbookindexbookmark  \glsxtrbookindexbookmark{group title}{name}

-

+

If \pdfbookmark has been defined, this will use that command to bookmark the group title. If section=chapter is set (default if chapters are defined) then this + id="dx1-13038"> is set (default if chapters are defined) then this uses level 1 otherwise it uses level 2. You can redefine this command if this isn’t appropriate. If \pdfbookmark hasn’t been defined, this command does nothin. -

The group heading is formatted according to -


The group heading is formatted according to +


\glsxtrbookindexformatheader  \glsxtrbookindexformatheader{group title} @@ -5322,81 +5343,81 @@ class="cmtt-10">} -

+

which is defined as

-
+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexformatheader}[1]{%  
  \par{\centering\glstreegroupheaderfmt{#1}\par}%  
}
-

where

where \glstreegroupheaderfmt is provided by the glossary-tree package, which is + id="dx1-13040"> package, which is automatically loaded. Note that the entry names aren’t encapsulated with \glstreenamefmt. -

The

The glossary-bookindex package provides some supplementary commands that + id="dx1-13041"> package provides some supplementary commands that aren’t used by default, but may be used when adjusting the style. These commands should only be used within one of the \print…glossary commands. (That is, they should only be used in glossary styles.) -



\glsxtrbookindexmarkentry  \glsxtrbookindexmarkentry{label}

-

+

This writes information to the .aux file that can be read on the next run to obtain the first and last entry on each page of the glossary. -

You can display the first entry associated with the current page using: -


You can display the first entry associated with the current page using: +


\glsxtrbookindexfirstmark  \glsxtrbookindexfirstmark

-

+

and the last entry associated with the current page using: -



\glsxtrbookindexlastmark  \glsxtrbookindexlastmark

-

+

These do nothing if there are no entries marked on the current page (or if the document build isn’t up to date). -

The entry is formatted using: -


The entry is formatted using: +


\glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt  \glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt{label}

-

+

for the first instance and -



\glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt  \glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt{label}

-

+

for the last. -

These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page +

These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page number is stable. For example, \glsxtrbookindexname can be redefined to mark the current entry: @@ -5404,13 +5425,13 @@ current entry:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexname}[1]{%  
  \glsxtrbookindexmarkentry{#1}%  
  \glossentryname{#1}%  
}
-

If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine +

If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine \glsxtrbookindexsubname as it defaults to \glsxtrbookindexname: @@ -5418,34 +5439,34 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexsubname}[1]{%  
  \glossentryname{#1}%  
}
-

-

Then if you’re using

+

Then if you’re using fancyhdr you can set the page style to show the first and last + id="dx1-13047"> you can set the page style to show the first and last entry for the current page with:

-
+
  \pagestyle{fancy}%  
  \lhead{\thepage}%  
  \lfoot{\glsxtrbookindexfirstmark}%  
  \cfoot{}%  
  \rfoot{\glsxtrbookindexlastmark}%
-

-

+

+

-

Top

2.9 Glossary Style Modifications

-

The

The glossaries-extra-stylemods package (more conveniently loaded through the §2.9.3 The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package. -

The

The glossaries package tries to determine the group title from its label by first checking if \glsxtr@grouptitle@label⟩ which shouldn’t clash with another package. You can set the group title using -



\glsxtrsetgrouptitle  label}{title}

-

+

For example:

-
+
\glsxtrsetgrouptitle{A}{A (a)}
-

This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can +

This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can use -



\glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle  }{title}

-

-

+

+

-

Top

2.9.1 Style Hooks

-

The commands

The commands \glossentryname and \glossentrydesc§5 Categories). This means you can make simple case-changing modifications to the name and description without defining a new glossary style. -

If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of

If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of name, you can use -



\glossentrynameother  label}{field}

-

+

This behaves just like \glossentryname (that is, it obeys description). See the key to field mappings table in the glossaries user manual. -

There is a hook after

There is a hook after \glossentryname and \Glossentryname: -



\glsxtrpostnamehook  \glsxtrpostnamehook{label}

-

+

By default this checks the indexname attribute. If the attribute exists for the category to which the label belongs, then the name is automatically indexed using -



\glsxtrdoautoindexname{}{indexname}

-

+

See §7 Auto-Indexing for further details. -

As from version 1.04, the post-name hook

As from version 1.04, the post-name hook \glsxtrpostnamehook will also use \glsxtrpostname -

+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrpostnamesymbol}{\space  
 (\glsentrysymbol{\glscurrententrylabel})}
-

-

The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also +

As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does +


\glsextrapostnamehook  \glsextrapostnamehook{label}

+

+(before \glsxtrpostnamecategory⟩) to allow for additional non-category related code. +This does nothing by default. +

The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also does -



\glsxtrpostdescription  \glsxtrpostdescription

-

+

This occurs before the original \glspostdescription, so if the nopostdot=false + id="dx1-15019"> option is used, it will be inserted before the terminating full stop. -

This new command will do

This new command will do \glsxtrpostdesccategory⟩ if it exists, where ⟨category⟩ is the category label associated with th \glsxtrpostdescgeneral for entries with the category set to general or + id="dx1-15020"> or \glsxtrpostdescacronym for entries with the category set to acronym. -

Since both . +

Since both \glossentry and \subglossentry set -



\glscurrententrylabel  \glscurrententrylabel

-

+

to the label for the current entry, you can use this within the definition of these post-description hooks if you need to reference the label. -

For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the +

For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the description in the glossary, but only for entries in the general category, then you could + id="dx1-15023"> category, then you could do:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrpostdescgeneral}{\space  
 (plural: \glsentryplural{\glscurrententrylabel})}
-

This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find +

This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find more complicated. (It also allows more flexibility if you decide to change the underlying glossary style.) -

This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore

This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore \glspostdescription or if you redefine \glspostdescription without including \glspostdescription to do nothing instead of using the nopostdot option to suppress the terminating full stop.) See option to suppress the terminating full stop.) See §2.9.3 The @@ -5698,16 +5731,16 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods Package

-

+

+

-

Top

2.9.2 Number List

-

The

The number list is now placed inside the argument of -



\GlsXtrFormatLocationList  \GlsXtrFormatLocationList{number list}

-

+

This is internally used by \glossaryentrynumbers. The \glossaryentrynumbers so that it doesn’t display th id="dx1-16004">number list, but it still saves the number list in case it’s required. -

If you want to suppress the

If you want to suppress the number list always use the nonumberlist option instead of redefining \glossaryentrynumbers to do nothing.
-

-

If you want to, for example, change the font for the entire

+

If you want to, for example, change the font for the entire number list then redefine \GlsXtrFormatLocationList as appropriate. Don’t modify \glossaryentrynumbers. -

Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the

Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the number list. This is quite fiddly to do with the base glossaries package, but glossaries-extra provides a way of doing this. First you need to enable this option and specify the text to display using: -



\GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag  }{pages}

-

+

where ⟨page⟩ is the text to display if the number list only contains a single location and @@ -5767,31 +5800,31 @@ class="cmti-10">pages⟩ is the text to display otherwise. For examp

-
+
\GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag{Page: }{Pages: }
-

An extra run is required when using this command. -

Use

An extra run is required when using this command. +

Use glsignore not @gobble as the format if you want to suppress the page number (and only index the entry once).
-

-

See the accompanying sample file

+

See the accompanying sample file sample-pages.tex. -

Note that

Note that bib2gls can be instructed to insert a prefix at the start of non-empty location lists, which can be used as an alternative to \GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag. -

+

-

Top

2.9.3 The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package

-

As from v1.02,

As from v1.02, glossaries-extra now includes the package glossaries-extra-stylemods that @@ -5803,12 +5836,12 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra. For example:

-
+
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
\usepackage{glossary-longragged}  
\usepackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}
-

Alternatively you can load

Alternatively you can load glossary-name.sty at the same time by passing ⟨glossaries-extra-stylemods -

+
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
\usepackage[longragged]{glossaries-extra-stylemods}
-

Another option is to use the

Another option is to use the stylemods key when you load long3col -

+
\usepackage[style=long3col,stylemods]{glossaries-extra}
-

Or the value of

Or the value of stylemods may be a comma-separated list of the style package @@ -5850,19 +5883,19 @@ identifiers. For example:

-
+
\usepackage[style=mcoltree,stylemods=mcols]{glossaries-extra}
-

Remember to group the value if it contains any commas: +

Remember to group the value if it contains any commas:

-
+
\usepackage[stylemods={mcols,longbooktabs}]{glossaries-extra}
-

-

Note that the

+

Note that the inline style is dealt with slightly differently. The original definition provided by the nopostdot option, but the post-description category hook can still be used. -

The

The tabular-like styles, such as \printglossary, \printnoidxglossary or \printunsrtglossary, you must also reset the glossary style. -

As from version 1.21, the hard-coded

As from version 1.21, the hard-coded \space before the number list in many of the predefined styles is replaced with -



\glsxtrprelocation  \glsxtrprelocation

-

+

This just defaults to \space but may be redefined as required. For example:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrprelocation}{\dotfill}
-

-

The

+

The list styles use -



\glsxtrprelocation  \glslistprelocation

-

+

(which defaults to \glsxtrprelocation) for top-level items and -



\glslistchildprelocation  \glslistchildprelocation

-

+

(which defaults to \glslistprelocation) for child items. -

For just the

For just the list style and its letter group variations (not the altlistlistdottednumber list for child entries is followed by -



\glslistchildpostlocation  \glslistchildpostlocation

-

+

which defaults to a full stop. -

The default value of

The default value of \glslistdottedwidth is changed so that it’s set at the start of the document (if it hasn’t been changed in the preamble). This should take into account situations where \hsize isn’t set until the start of the document. -

The

The index-like and tree-like styles insert the pre-number list space with -



\glstreeprelocation  \glstreeprelocation

-

+

(which defaults to \glsxtrprelocation) for top-level items and -



\glstreechildprelocation  \glstreechildprelocation

-

+

(which defaults to \glstreeprelocation) for child items. -

As from version 1.05, the

As from version 1.05, the glossaries-extra-stylemods package provides some additional commands for use with the alttreenotree option has been used when loading glossaries. -



\gglssetwidest  level]{name}

-

+

(New to version 1.21.) This is like \glssetwidest (provided by glossary-tree) but performs a global assignment. -



\eglssetwidest  level]{name}

-

+

This is like \glssetwidest but performs a protected expansion on ⟨name⟩. This has a localised effect. For a global setting, use -



\xglssetwidest  }

-

+

The following only set the value if ⟨name⟩ is wider than the current value (new to version 1.23). Local update: -



\glsupdatewidest  level]{name}

-

+

Global update: -



\gglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

-

+

Locale update (expands ⟨name⟩): -



\eglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

-

+

Global update (expands ⟨name⟩): -



\xglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

-

-

The widest entry value can later be retrieved using -


+

The widest entry value can later be retrieved using +


\glsgetwidestname  \glsgetwidestname

-

+

for the top-level entries and -



\glsgetwidestsubname  \glsgetwidestsubname{level}

-

+

for sub-entries, where ⟨level⟩ is the level number. -

Note that if you are using

Note that if you are using bib2glsTEX. -

The command

The command \glsfindwidesttoplevelname provided by glossary-tree has a CamelCase synonym: -



\glsFindWidestTopLevelName  \glsFindWidestTopLevelName[glossary list]

-

+

Similar commands are also provided: -



\glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName  glossary list]

-

+

This has an additional check that the entry has been used. Naturally this is only useful if the glossaries that use the alttreealttree



\glsFindWidestUsedAnyName  \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName[glossary list]

-

+

This is like the previous command but if doesn’t check the parent key. This is useful if @@ -6185,17 +6218,17 @@ class="cmss-10">parent



\glsFindWidestAnyName  \glsFindWidestAnyName[glossary list]

-

+

This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



\glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo  \glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo[glossary list]

-

+

This is like \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName but also sets the first two sub-levels as well. Any entry that has a great-grandparent is ignored. -



\glsFindWidestLevelTwo  \glsFindWidestLevelTwo[glossary list]

-

+

This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol  glossary list]{register}

-

+

This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName but also measures the symbol. The length of the widest symbol is stored in ⟨register⟩. -



\glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol  list]{register}

-

+

This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation  symbol register}{location register}

-

+

This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol but also measures the symbol register⟩ and the length of the widest number list is stored in ⟨location register⟩. -



\glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation  symbol register}{location register}

-

+

This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation  glossary list]{register}

-

+

This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation but doesn’t measure the symbol. The length of the widest number list is stored in ⟨register⟩. -



\glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation  list]{register}

-

+

This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -

The layout of the symbol, description and

The layout of the symbol, description and number list is governed by -



\glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation  label}{number list}

-

+

for top-level entries and -



\glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation  label}{number list}

-

+

for sub-entries. -

There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the

There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the alttree style: -



\glsxtralttreeInit  \glsxtralttreeInit

-

-

The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions +

+

The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions is provided by the length -



\glsxtrAltTreeIndent  \glsxtrAltTreeIndent

-

-

For additional commands that are available with the

+

For additional commands that are available with the alttree style, see the documented code (sample-alttree-marginpar.tex.

-

-

+

Top

3. Abbreviations

-

Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as +

Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as “laser”), initialisms (initial letters of a phrase, such as “html”, that aren’t pronounced as words) and contractions (where parts of words are omitted, often replaced by an apostrophe, such as “don’t”). The “acronym” code provided by the @@ -6404,10 +6437,10 @@ to be described for readers unfamiliar with the term). They are therefore more like a regular term, which may or may not require a description in the glossary. -

The

The glossaries-extra package corrects this misnomer, and provides better abbreviation handling, with -



\newabbreviation  }{long}

-

-

This sets the

+

This sets the category key to abbreviation by default, but that value may be @@ -6445,7 +6478,7 @@ href="#sec:categories">§5 Categories for further details. -

See

See §2.6 Nested Links regarding the pitfalls of using commands like \glsxtrshort within ⟨short⟩ or ⟨long⟩. -

Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations +

Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations or they may not be correctly applied.
-

-

The

+

The \newacronym command provided by the glossaries package is redefined by @@ -6473,7 +6506,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">acronym (see also href="#sec:acronymmods">§2.7 Acronym Style Modifications) so -



\newacronym  short}{long}

-

+

is now equivalent @@ -6512,7 +6545,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}
-

The

The \newabbreviation command is superficially similar to the glossaries package’s abbreviationglossaries package, although they may produce similar results.) -

The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like

The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like \gls varies according to the abbreviation style. The styles are set according to the entry’s category so, unlike the base glossaries package, you can have different abbreviation styles within the same glossary. -

There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on +

There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on first use by commands like short-footnote, the display and inline full forms are different. -

These formatting commands aren’t stored in the

These formatting commands aren’t stored in the short, shortplural\glsxtrlong and the case-changing variants don’t use \glsfirstlongfont. -

You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary +

You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary text using -



\glsuseabbrvfont  text}{category}

-

+

where ⟨category⟩ is the category label that identifies the abbreviation style. Similarly for the formatting command use by the long form: -



\glsuselongfont  text}{category}

-

+

-

Top

3.1 Tagging Initials

-

If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are +

If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are underlined in the glossary but not in the main part of the document, you can use -



\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨cs}

-

+

before you define your abbreviations. -

This command (robustly) defines ⟨

This command (robustly) defines ⟨cs⟩ (a control sequence) to accept a single argument, which is the letter (or letters) that needs to be tagged. The normal behaviour of this command within the document is to simply do its argument, but in @@ -6635,21 +6668,21 @@ href="#catattr.tagging">tagging attribute set to “true”. For those cases it will use -



\glsxtrtagfont  \glsxtrtagfont{text}

-

+

This command defaults to \underline{text} but may be redefined as required. -

The control sequence ⟨

The control sequence ⟨cs⟩ can’t already be defined when used with the unstarred version of \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging for safety reasons. The starred @@ -6658,7 +6691,7 @@ class="cmti-10">cs⟩. As with redefining any commands, ensure that you don’t redefine something important. In fact, just forget the existence of the starred version and let’s pretend I didn’t mention it. -

The first argument of

The first argument of \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging is a comma-separated list of category names. The §5 Categories) but this must be done before the glossary is displayed. -

The accompanying sample file

The accompanying sample file sample-mixtures.tex uses initial tagging for both the acronymabbreviation -

+
\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging{acronym,abbreviation}{\itag}
-

This defines the command

This defines the command \itag which can be used in the definitions. For example:

-
+
\newacronym  
 [description={a system for detecting the location and  
 speed of ships, aircraft, etc, through the use of radio @@ -6702,18 +6735,18 @@ example:  
\newabbreviation{xml}{XML}  
 {e\itag{x}tensible \itag{m}arkup \itag{l}anguage}
-

The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for +

The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for entries with the tagging attribute set. -

+

-

Top

3.2 Abbreviation Styles

-

The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using: -


The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using: +


\setabbreviationstyle  ]{style-name}

-

+

where ⟨style-name⟩ is the name of the style and ⟨category⟩ is the category label @@ -6745,11 +6778,11 @@ class="cmss-10">regular attribute to true. -

If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a +

If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a different category to each group and set the style for the given category.
-

-

Note that

+

Note that \setacronymstyle is disabled by glossaries-extra. Use

@@ -6770,7 +6803,7 @@ href="#sec:acronymmods">§2.7 Acronym Style Modifications). However the original acronym interface is incompatible with all the commands described here. -

Abbreviations can be used with the standard

Abbreviations can be used with the standard glossaries commands, such as \gls, @@ -6780,7 +6813,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\acrshort\acronymfont). The short form can be produced with: -



\glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

-

+

(Use this instead of \acrshort.) -

The long form can be produced with -


The long form can be produced with +


\glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

-

+

(Use this instead of \acrlong.) -

The

The inline full form can be produced with -



\glsxtrfull  label}[insert]

-

+

(This this instead of \acrfull.) -

In general, it’s best not to use commands like

In general, it’s best not to use commands like \glsfirst for abbreviations, especially if you use the ⟨insert⟩ optional argument. Use either \gls (possibly with a reset) or \glsxtrfull.
-

-

As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format +

+

As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format used on first use with short-nolongfirst use, but the full form will display the long form followed by the short form in parentheses. -

If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the +

If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the commands described in §4 Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents instead.
-

-

The arguments ⟨

+

The arguments ⟨options⟩, ⟨label⟩ and ⟨insert⟩ are the same as for commands such as \glstext. There are also analogous case-changing commands: -

First letter upper case short form: -


First letter upper case short form: +


\Glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

-

-

First letter upper case long form: -


+

First letter upper case long form: +


\Glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

-

-

First letter upper case inline full form: -


+

First letter upper case inline full form: +


\Glsxtrfull  label}[insert]

-

-

All upper case short form: +

+

All upper case short form: -



\Glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

-

-

All upper case long form: -


+

All upper case long form: +


\Glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

-

-

All upper case inline full form: -


+

All upper case inline full form: +


\GLSxtrfull  label}[insert]

-

-

Plural forms are also available. -

Short form plurals: -


+

Plural forms are also available. +

Short form plurals: +


\glsxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\Glsxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\GLSxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

-

-

Long form plurals: -


+

Long form plurals: +


\glsxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\Glsxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\GLSxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

-

-

Full form plurals: -


+

Full form plurals: +


\glsxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\Glsxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

-

-


+


\GLSxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

-

-

Be careful about using

+

Be careful about using \glsentryfull, \Glsentryfull, \glsentryfullpl and @@ -7069,13 +7102,13 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsentryshort etc.
-

-

+

+

-

Top

3.3 Shortcut Commands

-

The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the package option +

The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the package option shortcutstable 3.1. -


@@ -7415,10 +7448,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation
-

Top

3.4 Predefined Abbreviation Styles

-

There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a +

There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a regular entry (so that \gls uses \gls uses \glsxtrgenabbrvfmt). -

The regular entry abbreviation styles set the

The regular entry abbreviation styles set the regular attribute to “true” for the @@ -7454,7 +7487,7 @@ class="cmss-10">long\glsxtrshort. -

The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the

The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the regular attribute. The \glsxtrfullformat that are defined by the style). -

In both cases, the

In both cases, the first use of \gls may not match the text produced by \glsfirst (and likewise for the plural and case-changing versions). -

The sample file

The sample file sample-abbr-styles.tex demonstrates all predefined styles described here. -

For the “sc” styles that use

For the “sc” styles that use \textsc, be careful about your choice of fonts as some only have limited support. For example, you may not be able to combine bold @@ -7493,52 +7526,52 @@ class="cmss-10">fontenc package with the T1 option or something similar.
-

-

The parenthetical styles, such as

+

The parenthetical styles, such as long-short, use -



\glsxtrparen  \glsxtrparen{text}

-

+

to set the parenthetical material. This just puts parentheses around the text: (⟨text⟩). -

The basic abbreviation styles, such as

The basic abbreviation styles, such as long-short and short-long use -



\glsabbrvdefaultfont  \glsabbrvdefaultfont{text}

-

+

for the short form. This just does ⟨text⟩ by default. (That is, no font change is applied.) On first use, -



\glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont  \glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont{text}

-

+

is used instead. By default, this just does \glsabbrvdefaultfont. The long form is formatted according to -



\glslongdefaultfont  }

-

+

which again just does ⟨text⟩ (no font change). On first use, -



\glsfirstlongdefaultfont  \glsfirstlongdefaultfont{text}

-

+

is used instead. This just does \glslongdefaultfont. The plural suffix used for the short form is given by -



\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix  \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix

-

+

which defaults to \glspluralsuffix. -

The small-cap styles, such as

The small-cap styles, such as long-short-sc and short-sc-long, use -



\glsabbrvscfont  \glsabbrvscfont{text}

-

+

which uses \textsc.3.1 On first use -



\glsabbrvdefaultfont  \glsfirstabbrvscfont{text}

-

+

is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvscfont by default. So redefine, \glsabbrvscfont to change first and subsequent uses or \glsfirstabbrvscfont to change just the first use. -

The long form for the small-cap styles uses

The long form for the small-cap styles uses \glslongdefaultfont or \glsfirstlongdefaultfont, as with the basic style. The suffix is given by -



\glsxtrscsuffix  \glsxtrscsuffix

-

+

This is defined as

-
+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrscsuffix}{\glstextup{\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix}}
-

The

The \glstextup command is provided by glossaries and is used to switch off the @@ -7644,51 +7677,51 @@ attributes. See §5 Categories for further details.) -

The small styles, such as

The small styles, such as long-short-sm and short-sm-long, use -



\glsabbrvsmfont  \glsabbrvsmfont{text}

-

+

which uses \textsmaller. (This requires the relsizes package, which isn’t loaded by glossaries-extra, so must be loaded explicitly.) On first use -



\glsfirstabbrvsmfont  \glsfirstabbrvsmfont{text}

-

+

is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvsmfont by default. -

The long form for the smaller styles uses

The long form for the smaller styles uses \glslongdefaultfont or \glsfirstlongdefaultfont, as with the basic style. The suffix is given by -



\glsxtrsmsuffix  \glsxtrsmsuffix

-

+

which defaults to just \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix. -

The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as

The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as long-short-em or short-em-long, use -



\glsabbrvemfont  \glsabbrvemfont{text}

-

+

On first use -



\glsfirstabbrvemfont  \glsfirstabbrvemfont{text}

-

+

is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvemfont by default. The suffix is given by -



\glsxtremsuffix  \glsxtremsuffix

-

+

which defaults to just \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix. The long form is as for the basic style unless the style is a “long-em” style. -

The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as

The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as long-em-short-em or short-em-long-em, use -



\glsfirstlongemfont  \glsfirstlongemfont{long-form}

-

+

instead of \glsfirstlongdefaultfont{long-form} and -



\glslongemfont  }

-

+

instead of \glslongdefaultfont{long-form}. The first form \glsfirstlongemfont is initialised to use \glslongemfont. -

The user styles have similar commands: -


The user styles have similar commands: +


\glsabbrvuserfont  \glsabbrvuserfont{text}

-

+

for the short form, -



\glsfirstabbrvuserfont  \glsfirstabbrvuserfont{text}

-

+

for the first use short form, -



\glslonguserfont  \glslonguserfont{text}

-

+

for the long form, -



\glsfirstlonguserfont  \glsfirstlonguserfont{text}

-

+

for the first use long form, and -



\glsxtrusersuffix  \glsxtrusersuffix

-

+

for the short plural suffix. -

Similarly for the hyphen styles: -


Similarly for the hyphen styles: +


\glsabbrvhyphenfont  \glsabbrvhyphenfont{text}

-

+

for the short form, -



\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont  \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{text}

-

+

for the first use short form, -



\glslonghyphenfont  \glslonghyphenfont{text}

-

+

for the long form, -



\glsfirstlonghyphenfont  \glsfirstlonghyphenfont{text}

-

+

for the first use long form, and -



\glsxtrhyphensuffix  \glsxtrhyphensuffix

-

+

for the short plural suffix. -

Similarly for the “only” styles, such as

Similarly for the “only” styles, such as long-only-short-only: -



\glsabbrvonlyfont  \glsabbrvonlyfont{text}

-

+

for the short form, -



\glsfirstabbrvonlyfont  \glsfirstabbrvonlyfont{text}

-

+

for the first use short form, -



\glslongonlyfont  \glslongonlyfont{text}

-

+

for the long form, -



\glsfirstlongonlyfont  }

-

+

for the first use long form, and -



\glsxtronlysuffix  \glsxtronlysuffix

-

+

for the short plural suffix. -

Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of +

Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of commands like \gls), is placed outside the font command in the predefined styles. To move it inside, use: -



\glsxtrinsertinsidetrue  \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue

-

+

This applies to all the predefined styles. For example:

-
+
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short}  
\renewcommand*{\glsfirstlongdefaultfont}[1]{\emph{#1}}  
\glsxtrinsertinsidetrue
-

This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default +

This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default (without \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue) would place the inserted text outside of the emphasized font. -

Note that for some styles, such as the

Note that for some styles, such as the short-long, the inserted text would be placed inside the font command for the short form (rather than the long form in the above example). -

Remember that

Remember that \textsc renders lowercase letters as small capitals. Uppercase letters are rendered as normal uppercase letters, so if you specify the short form in @@ -7942,49 +7975,49 @@ convert its argument to lowercase. For example:

-
+
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
-

-

If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it +

+

If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it easier to redefine this command to convert case:

-
+
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeTextLowercase{#1}}}  
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvsmfont}[1]{\textsmaller{\MakeTextUppercase{#1}}}
-

-

Some of the styles use -


+

Some of the styles use +


\glsxtrfullsep  \glsxtrfullsep{label}

-

+

as a separator between the long and short forms. This is defined as a space by default, but may be changed as required. For example:

-
+
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{~}
-

or +

or

-
+
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{\glsacspace{#1}}
-

-

The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows:

+

+

The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows:

  • field1⟩[field2⟩[-modifier2⟩][-user] -

    This is for the parenthetical styles. The

    This is for the parenthetical styles. The -modifier⟩ parts may be omitted. These styles display ⟨field1⟩ or ⟨field2⟩ starts with “no” then that element is omitted from the display style (no parenthetical part) but is included in the inline style. -

    If the

    If the -modifier⟩ part is present, then the field has a font changing command applied to it. The special modifier -only indicates that field is only present according to whether or not the entry has been used. -

    If

    If post is present then ⟨field2⟩ is placed after the link-text using the post-link hook. -

    If the

    If the -user part is present, then the user1 value, if provided, is inserted into the parenthetical material . (The field used for the inserted material may be changed.) -

    Examples:

    +

    Examples:

    • \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont on first
    • style-noreg -

      Some styles set the

      Some styles set the regular attribute. In some cases, there’s a version of the @@ -8095,7 +8128,7 @@ href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-noreg">long-em-noshort-em-noreg style is a minor variation that style that doesn’t set the attribute. -

      There are a few “noshort” styles, such as

      There are a few “noshort” styles, such as long-hyphen-noshort-noreg, that have @@ -8113,7 +8146,7 @@ class="cmti-10">modifier1⟩]-[post]footnote -

      The display style uses ⟨

      The display style uses ⟨field1⟩ followed by a footnote with the other field in it. If post is present then the footnote is placed after the link-text using the post-link hook. The inline style does ⟨field1⟩ followed by the other field in parentheses. -

      If

      If -modifier1⟩ is present, ⟨field1⟩ has a font-changing command applied to it. -

      Examples:

      +

      Examples:

      • short-sc-postfootnote: short form in smallcaps with the long form in the footnote outside of the link-text.
      -

      Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations +

      Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations where \footnote doesn’t work.
      -

      +

    • style-desc -

      Like ⟨

      Like ⟨style⟩ but the description key must be provided when defining abbreviations with this style. -

      Examples:

      +

      Examples:

      -

      Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04 +

      Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04 styles that didn’t fit this naming scheme are either provided with a synonym (where the former name wasn’t ambiguous) or provided with a deprecated synonym (where the former name was confusing). The deprecated style names generate a warning using: -



      \GlsXtrWarnDeprecatedAbbrStyle  old-name}{new-name}

      -

      +

      where ⟨old-name⟩ is the deprecated name and ⟨new-name⟩ is the preferred name. You can suppress these warnings by redefining this command to do nothing. -

      +

      -

      Top

      3.4.1 Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Set the Regular Attribute

      -

      The following abbreviation styles set the

      The following abbreviation styles set the regular attribute to “true” for all categories @@ -8217,106 +8250,132 @@ class="description">This only displays the short form on first use. The name is set to - the short form. The is set to the + short form through the command +


      \glsxtrshortnolongname  \glsxtrshortnolongname

      +

      + (Similarly for the other shortmodifier-nolongmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) This command is expanded as the entry is defined, so any + redefinition must be done before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym) for it to + take effect. Make sure to \protect any formatting commands (or anything else + that shouldn’t be expanded). +

      The description is set to the long form. The inline full form - displays ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩). The long form on its own can be displayed through - commands like is set to the long form. The inline full form displays ⟨short⟩ + (⟨long⟩). The long form on its own can be displayed through commands like + \glsxtrlong. -

      + id="dx1-23007">. +

      short
      A synonym for short-nolong. + id="dx1-23009">.
      nolong-short
      Like short-nolong but the inline full form displays ⟨ but the inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩).
      short-sc-nolong
      Like
      Like short-nolong but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + id="dx1-23013"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont (which defaults to (which defaults to \textsc).
      short-sc
      A synonym for short-sc-nolong + id="dx1-23016"> + + +
      nolong-short-sc
      Like
      Like short-sc-nolong but the inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ - (⟨ but the inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). + The name is still obtained from \glsxtrshortnolongname (similarly + for the other nolongmodifier-shortmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated + otherwise).
      short-sm-nolong
      Like
      Like short-nolong but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + id="dx1-23020"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont (which defaults to (which defaults to \textsmaller). - - -
      short-sm
      A synonym for short-sm-nolong. + id="dx1-23023">.
      nolong-short-sm
      Like
      Like short-sm-nolong but the inline full form displays ⟨ but the inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). @@ -8324,33 +8383,33 @@ class="cmti-10">short⟩). short-em-nolong
      Like
      Like short-nolong but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + id="dx1-23027"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. + id="dx1-23028">.
      short-em
      A synonym for short-em-nolong + id="dx1-23030">
      nolong-short-em
      Like short-em-nolong but the inline full form displays ⟨ but the inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). @@ -8358,333 +8417,385 @@ class="cmti-10">short⟩). short-nolong-desc
      Like the short-nolong style, but the style, but the name is set to the full - form and the is set to the full form + obtained by expanding +


      \glsxtrshortdescname  \glsxtrshortdescname

      +

      + (Similarly for the other shortmodifier-nolongmodifier-desc styles, unless + indicated otherwise.) This command is expanded when the entry is defined, so + \protect fragile and formatting commands and only redefine this command + before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym). +

      The description must be supplied by the user. You may prefer - to use the must be supplied by the user. You may prefer to use + the short-nolong style with the post-description hook set to display - the long form and override the style with the post-description hook set to display + the long form and override the description key. (See the sample file + id="dx1-23039"> key. (See the sample file sample-acronym-desc.tex.) -

      +

      short-desc
      A synonym for short-nolong-desc. + id="dx1-23041">.
      short-sc-nolong-desc
      Like
      Like short-nolong but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + id="dx1-23043"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont (which defaults to (which defaults to \textsc). + + +
      short-sc-desc
      A synonym for short-sc-nolong-desc. + id="dx1-23046">.
      short-sm-nolong-desc
      Like short-nolong-desc but redefines \glsabbrvfont to - use but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + \glsabbrvsmfont (which defaults to (which defaults to \textsmaller).
      short-sm-desc
      A synonym for short-sm-nolong-desc. + id="dx1-23051">.
      short-em-nolong-desc
      Like short-nolong-desc but redefines \glsabbrvfont to - use but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + \glsabbrvemfont. + id="dx1-23054">.
      short-em-desc
      A synonym for short-em-nolong-desc. - - - + id="dx1-23056">.
      long-noshort-desc
      This style only displays the long form, regardless of first - or subsequent use of commands
      This style only displays the long form, regardless of first or + subsequent use of commands \gls. The short form may be accessed + id="dx1-23058">. The short form may be accessed through commands like \glsxtrshort. The inline full form displays ⟨. The inline full form displays ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). -

      The name and

      The sort keys are set to the long form and the key are set to the long form. The name key is also set to the long form, + but this is done by expanding +


      \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname  \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname

      +

      + (Similarly for the other longmodifier-noshortmodifier-desc styles, unless + indicated otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before + abbreviations are defined, and any fragile or formatting commands within it + need protecting. +

      The description must - be provided by the user. The predefined glossary styles won’t display the - short form. You can use the post-description hook to automatically append - the short form to the description. The inline full form will display ⟨long⟩ - (⟨ must be provided by the user. The predefined glossary styles + won’t display the short form. You can use the post-description hook to + automatically append the short form to the description. The inline full form + will display ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩).

      long-desc
      A synonym for long-noshort-desc. + id="dx1-23065">.
      long-noshort-sc-desc
      Like the
      Like the long-noshort-desc style but the short form - (accessed through commands like style but the short form (accessed + through commands like \glsxtrshort) use ) use \glsabbrvscfont. - (This style was originally called . (This style was + originally called long-desc-sc. Renamed in version - 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for - backward-compatibility.) + id="dx1-23070">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name + retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      long-noshort-sm-desc
      Like long-noshort-desc but redefines \glsabbrvfont to - use but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + \glsabbrvsmfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called long-desc-sm. - Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated - synonym for backward-compatibility.) + id="dx1-23074">. Renamed in + version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for + backward-compatibility.) + + +
      long-noshort-em-desc
      Like long-noshort-desc but redefines \glsabbrvfont to - use but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + \glsabbrvemfont. The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style was - originally called . The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style was originally + called long-desc-em. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name - retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.) + id="dx1-23078">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a + deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      long-em-noshort-em-desc
      New to version 1.04, like
      New to version 1.04, like long-noshort-desc but + id="dx1-23080"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. The long form uses + id="dx1-23081">. The long form uses \glsfirstlongemfont and and \glslongemfont. + id="dx1-23083">.
      long-noshort
      This style doesn’t really make sense if you don’t use the short - form anywhere in the document, but is provided for completeness. This is + id="dx1-23084">
      This style doesn’t really make sense if you don’t use the short form + anywhere in the document, but is provided for completeness. This is like the long-noshort-desc style, but the name and style, but the sort keys are set to the - short form and the key is set to the short + form. The name key is also set to the short form, but this is done by + expanding +


      \glsxtrlongnoshortname  \glsxtrlongnoshortname

      +

      + (Similarly for other longmodifier-noshortmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before abbreviations are + defined, and fragile or formatting commands should be protected. +

      The description is set to the long form. -

      + id="dx1-23089"> is set to the long form. +

      long
      A synonym for long-noshort - - - + id="dx1-23091">
      long-noshort-sc
      Like the long-noshort style but the short form (accessed through - commands like style but the short form (accessed through + commands like \glsxtrshort) use ) use \glsabbrvscfont. (This style was - originally called . (This style was originally + called long-sc. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name - retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.) + id="dx1-23096">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a + deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      long-noshort-sm
      Like
      Like long-noshort but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + id="dx1-23098"> but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called long-sm. Renamed in - version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for + id="dx1-23100">. Renamed in + version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      long-noshort-em
      This style is like long-noshort but redefines \glsabbrvfont - to use but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use + \glsabbrvemfont. The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style - was originally called . The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style was originally + called long-em. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name - retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.) + id="dx1-23104">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a + deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      long-em-noshort-em
      New to version 1.04, this style is like long-noshort but - redefines but redefines + + + + \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont, \glsfirstlongfont - to use , \glsfirstlongfont to use + \glsfirstlongemfont and \glslongfont to use \glslongemfont. - The short form isn’t used by commands like \glslongemfont. The short + form isn’t used by commands like \gls, but can be obtained - using , but can be obtained using + \glsxtrshort. The related style . The related style long-em-noshort-em-noreg doesn’t - set the doesn’t set the + regular attribute. + id="dx1-23111"> attribute.
      -

      +

      -

      Top

      3.4.2 Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Don’t Set the Regular Attribute

      -

      The following abbreviation styles will set the

      The following abbreviation styles will set the regular attribute to “false” if it has @@ -8695,44 +8806,54 @@ also be set, depending on the style. id="abbrstyle.long-short">long-short

      On On first use, this style uses the format ⟨first use, this style uses the format ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). The inline - and display full forms are the same. The name and short⟩). The inline and + display full forms are the same. The sort keys are - set to the short form. (The key is set to the short form. The name key additionally includes the font - command \glsabbrvfont.) The + is also set to the short form through +


      \glsxtrlongshortname  \glsxtrlongshortname

      +

      + (Similarly for other longmodifier-shortmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) Any redefinition of this command must come before the + abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect + any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with + \the\glsshorttok. +

      The description is set to the long form. The - long and short forms are separated by \glsxtrfullsep. If you want to - insert material within the parentheses (such as a translation), try the - is set to the long form. The long and short forms are separated + by \glsxtrfullsep. If you want to insert material within the parentheses + (such as a translation), try the long-short-user style. - - - -

      +

      long-short-sc
      Like Like long-short but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use - but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont.
      @@ -8740,12 +8861,11 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfontlong-short-sm
      Like Like long-short but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use - but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont.
      @@ -8753,12 +8873,11 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfontlong-short-em
      Like Like long-short but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use - but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont.
      @@ -8766,73 +8885,107 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfontlong-em-short-em
      New to version 1.04, this style is like New to version 1.04, this style is like long-short-em but - redefines but redefines + \glsfirstlongfont to use \glsfirstlongemfont. + + +
      long-only-short-only
      New to version 1.17, this style only shows the long form - on first use and only shows the short form on subsequent use. The inline - full form \glsxtrfull shows the long form followed by the short form in - parentheses. -
      +class="description">New to version 1.17, this style only shows the long form on first + use and only shows the short form on subsequent use. The inline full form + \glsxtrfull shows the long form followed by the short form in parentheses. + The name field is obtained from +


      \glsxtronlyname  \glsxtronlyname

      +

      + Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations + are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any + commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with + \the\glsshorttok. +

      long-only-short-only-desc
      New to version 1.17, this style is like -
      New to version 1.17, this style is like long-only-short-only but the user must supply the description. -
      + id="dx1-24025"> + but the user must supply the description. The name field is obtained + from +


      \glsxtronlydescname  \glsxtronlydescname

      +

      + Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations + are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any + commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with + \the\glsshorttok. +

      long-em-noshort-em-noreg
      New to version 1.17, this style is like -
      New to version 1.17, this style is like long-em-noshort-em but doesn’t set the + but doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24030"> attribute.
      long-short-user
      This style was introduced in version 1.04. It’s like the long-short style + id="dx1-24032"> style but additional information can be inserted into the parenthetical material. This checks the value of the field given by -



      \glsxtruserfield  \glsxtruserfield

      -

      +

      (which defaults to useri) using \ifglshasfield (provided by (provided by glossaries). If the field hasn’t been set, the style behaves like the long-short style and produces + id="dx1-24035"> style and produces ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩) but if the field has been set, the contents of that field are inserted @@ -8841,33 +8994,37 @@ class="cmti-10">long⟩ (⟨short⟩, ⟨field-value⟩). The format is governed by -



      \glsxtruserparen  \glsxtruserparen{text}{label}

      -

      +

      where ⟨text⟩ is the short form (for the long-short-user style) or the long form (for + id="dx1-24037"> style) or the long form (for the short-long-user style). This command first inserts a space using + id="dx1-24038"> style). This command first inserts a space using \glsxtrfullsep and then the parenthetical content (using \glsxtrparen). + id="dx1-24039">). -

      The ⟨

      The name is obtained by expanding \glsxtrlongshortname (see above). The + ⟨text⟩ argument includes the font formatting command, \glsfirstabbrvfont short} in the case of the long-short-user style and style and \glsfirstlongfont{long} in the case of the short-long-user style. -

      For example: + id="dx1-24042"> style. +

      For example:

      -
      +
      \setabbreviationstyle[acronym]{long-short-user}  
      \newacronym{tug}{TUG}{\TeX\ User Group}  
      \newacronym  
       [user1={German Speaking \TeX\ User Group}]  
       {dante}{DANTE}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V}
      -

      On first use,

      On first use, \gls{tug} will appear as:

      -

      T

      TEX User Group (TUG)

      -

      whereas

      whereas \gls{dante} will appear as:

      -

      Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung T

      Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung TEX e.V (DANTE, German Speaking TEX User Group)

      -

      The short form is formatted according to -


      The short form is formatted according to +


      \glsabbrvuserfont  \glsabbrvuserfont{text}

      -

      +

      and the plural suffix is given by -



      \glsxtrusersuffix  \glsxtrusersuffix

      -

      -

      These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps +

      +

      These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps style, you can just set these commands to those used by the long-short-sc + id="dx1-24045"> style:

      -
      +
      \renewcommand{\glsabbruserfont}[1]{\glsabbrvscfont{#1}}  
      \renewcommand{\glsxtrusersuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}
      -

      +

      long-noshort-noreg
      This style is like long-noshort but it doesn’t set the but it doesn’t set the regular + id="dx1-24048"> attribute.
      long-noshort-desc-noreg
      This style is like long-noshort-desc but it doesn’t set the + id="dx1-24050"> but it doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24051"> attribute.
      long-short-desc
      On first use, this style uses the format ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). The inline and display full forms are the same. The name is set to the full + id="dx1-24054"> is set to the full form. The sort key is set to ⟨ key is set to ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩). Before version 1.04, this was incorrectly set to the short form. If you want to revert back to this you can redefine -



      \glsxtrlongshortdescsort  \glsxtrlongshortdescsort

      -

      +

      For example:

      -
      +
      \renewcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortdescsort}{\the\glsshorttok}
      -

      The

      The description must be supplied by the user. The long and short forms are - separated by \glsxtrfullsep. + id="dx1-24057"> must be supplied by the user. The long and short + forms are separated by \glsxtrfullsep. The name field is obtained + from +


      \glsxtrlongshortdescname  \glsxtrlongshortdescname

      +

      + (Similarly for other longmodifier-shortmodifier-desc styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) Any redefinition of this command must come before the + abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect + any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with + \the\glsshorttok.

      long-short-sc-desc
      Like long-short-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont. + id="dx1-24062">.
      long-short-sm-desc
      Like long-short-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. + id="dx1-24065">.
      long-short-em-desc
      Like long-short-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. + id="dx1-24068">.
      long-em-short-em-desc
      New to version 1.04, this style is like long-short-em-desc but + id="dx1-24070"> but redefines \glsfirstlongfont to use \glsfirstlongemfont. + id="dx1-24071">.
      long-em-noshort-em-desc-noreg
      New to version 1.17, this style is like long-em-noshort-em-desc but doesn’t set the but doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24074"> attribute.
      long-short-user-desc
      New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the long-short-desc style and the style and the long-short-user style. The display and inline forms - are as for style. The display and + inline forms are as for long-short-user and the and the name key is as long-short-desc. The description - key must be supplied in the optional argument of key is obtained + from +


      \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname  \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname

      + + + +

      + Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. +

      The description key must be supplied in the optional argument of + \newabbreviation (or \newacronym). The sort key is set to ⟨ key is set to ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩) as per the short⟩) as per + the long-short-desc - style. -

      + id="dx1-24083"> style. +

      short-nolong-noreg
      This is like short-nolong but doesn’t set the but doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24086"> attribute.
      nolong-short-noreg
      This is like nolong-short but doesn’t set the but doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24089"> attribute.
      short-long
      On first use, this style uses the format ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩). The inline and display full forms are the same. The name and and sort keys are set to the + id="dx1-24093"> keys are set to the short form. The description is set to the long form. The short and long - - - + id="dx1-24094"> is set to the long form. The short and long forms are separated by \glsxtrfullsep. If you want to insert material within the parentheses (such as a translation), try the short-long-user + id="dx1-24095"> style. -
      +

      The name field is obtained from +


      \glsxtrshortlongname  \glsxtrshortlongname

      +

      + (Similarly for other shortmodifier-longmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) Any redefinition of this command must come before the + abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect + any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with + \the\glsshorttok. +

      short-sc-long
      Like short-long but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont. + id="dx1-24100">.
      short-sm-long
      Like short-long but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. + id="dx1-24103">.
      short-em-long
      Like short-long but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. + id="dx1-24106">.
      short-em-long-em
      New to version 1.04, this style is like short-em-long but redefines + id="dx1-24108"> but redefines \glsfirstlongfont to use \glsfirstlongemfont. + id="dx1-24109">.
      short-long-user
      New to version 1.04. This style is like the long-short-user - style but with the long and short forms switched. The parenthetical - material is governed by the same command style but + with the long and short forms switched. The parenthetical material is governed + by the same command \glsxtruserparen, but - the first argument supplied to it is the long form instead of the short - form. -
      + id="dx1-24112">, but the first argument supplied to it + + + + is the long form instead of the short form. The name field is obtained by + expanding +


      \glsxtrshortlongname  \glsxtrshortlongname

      +

      + Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or + \newacronym) and commands that should be expanded need to be + protected. +

      short-nolong-desc-noreg
      This style is like short-nolong-desc but it doesn’t set the + id="dx1-24116"> but it doesn’t set the regular attribute. + id="dx1-24117"> attribute.
      short-long-desc
      On first use, this style uses the format ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩). The inline and - display full forms are the same. The long⟩). The + inline and display full forms are the same. The name is set to the full form. The is set to the full + form. The description - must be supplied by the user. The short and long forms are separated by + id="dx1-24121"> must be supplied by the user. The short and long + forms are separated by \glsxtrfullsep. The name field is obtained + from +


      \glsxtrshortlongdescname  \glsxtrshortlongdescname

      +

      + (Similarly for other shortmodifier-longmodifier-desc styles, unless indicated + otherwise.) Any redefinition of this command must come before the + abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect + any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced + with \the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with \glsxtrfullsep. -

      +class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok. +

      short-sc-long-desc
      Like short-long-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont. + id="dx1-24126">.
      short-sm-long-desc
      Like short-long-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. + id="dx1-24129">.
      short-em-long-desc
      Like short-long-desc but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. + id="dx1-24132">.
      short-em-long-em-desc
      New to version 1.04, this style is like short-em-long-desc but + id="dx1-24134"> but redefines \glsfirstlongfont to use \glsfirstlongemfont. - - - + id="dx1-24135">.
      short-long-user-desc
      New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the short-long-desc style and the style and the short-long-user style. The display and inline forms - are as for style. The display and + inline forms are as for short-long-user and the , but the name key is as short-long-desc. The description - key must be supplied in the optional argument of key is obtained + from + + + +


      \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname  \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname

      +

      + Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. +

      The description key must be supplied in the optional argument of + \newabbreviation (or \newacronym). -

      +

      short-footnote
      On first use, this style displays the short form with the long form as a footnote. This style automatically sets the nohyperfirst attribute to “true” for + id="dx1-24145"> attribute to “true” for the supplied category, so the first use won’t be hyperlinked (but the footnote + id="dx1-24146">first use won’t be hyperlinked (but the footnote marker may be, if the hyperref package is used). -

      The inline full form uses the ⟨ package is used). +

      The inline full form uses the ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩) style. The name is set to the short + id="dx1-24148"> is set to the short form. The description is set to the long form. -

      As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use: -


      is set to the long form. The name key is obtained by + expanding +


      \glsxtrfootnotename  \glsxtrfootnotename

      +

      + (Similarly for other shortmodifier-modifierfootnote styles, unless + indicated otherwise.) Again, this command should only be redefined before + \newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile or formatting commands + should be protected from expansion. +

      As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use: +


      \glsfirstlongfootnotefont  \glsfirstlongfootnotefont{text}

      -

      +

      to format the long form on first use or for the full form and -


      first use or for the full form and +


      \glslongfootnotefont  \glslongfootnotefont{text}

      -

      +

      to format the long form elsewhere (for example, when used with \glsxtrlong). -

      As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use: -


      As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use: +


      \glsxtrabbrvfootnote  \glsxtrabbrvfootnote{label}{long}

      -

      +

      By default, this just does \footnote{long} (the first argument is ignored). For @@ -9405,22 +9679,22 @@ class="cmtt-10">} (the first argument is ignored). For

      -
      +
      \renewcommand{\glsxtrabbrvfootnote}[2]{%  
        \footnote{\glshyperlink[#2]{#1}}%  
      }
      -

      or to include the short form with a hyperlink: +

      or to include the short form with a hyperlink:

      -
      +
      \renewcommand{\glsxtrabbrvfootnote}[2]{%  
        \footnote{\glshyperlink[\glsfmtshort{#1}]{#1}: #2}%  
      }
      -

      Note that I haven’t used commands like

      Note that I haven’t used commands like \glsxtrshort to avoid interference (see Nested Links). footnote

      A synonym for short-footnote. + id="dx1-24158">.
      short-sc-footnote
      Like short-footnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called footnote-sc. Renamed in + id="dx1-24162">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-sc-footnote
      Like short-footnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called footnote-sm. Renamed in + id="dx1-24166">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-em-footnote
      Like short-footnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called footnote-em. Renamed in + id="dx1-24170">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-postfootnote
      This is similar to the short-footnote style but doesn’t modify the + id="dx1-24172"> style but doesn’t modify the category attribute. Instead it changes \glsxtrpostlinkcategory to insert the + id="dx1-24173"> to insert the footnote after the link-text on first use. This will also defer the footnote until after any following punctuation character that’s recognised by \glsxtrifnextpunc. -

      The inline full form uses the ⟨. +

      The inline full form uses the ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩) style. The name is set to the short + id="dx1-24177"> is set to the short form. The description is set to the long form. Note that this style will change + id="dx1-24178"> is set to the long form. Note that this style will change \glsxtrfull (and it’s variants) so that it fakes non-first use. (Otherwise the + id="dx1-24179">first use. (Otherwise the footnote would appear after the inline form.)

      postfootnote
      A synonym for short-postfootnote. + id="dx1-24181">. @@ -9539,124 +9813,133 @@ class="cmss-10">short-postfootnoteshort-sc-postfootnote
      Like short-postfootnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvscfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called postfootnote-sc. Renamed in + id="dx1-24185">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-sm-postfootnote
      Like short-postfootnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvsmfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called postfootnote-sm. Renamed + id="dx1-24189">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-em-postfootnote
      Like short-postfootnote but redefines but redefines \glsabbrvfont to use \glsabbrvemfont. (This style was originally called . (This style was originally called postfootnote-em. Renamed + id="dx1-24193">. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
      short-postlong-user
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the short-long-user style but defers the parenthetical material to after the - link-text. This means that you don’t have such a long hyperlink (which - can cause problems for the DVI LATEX format) and it also means - that the user supplied material can include a hyperlink to another - location. + id="dx1-24195"> style but defers the parenthetical material to after the link-text. + This means that you don’t have such a long hyperlink (which can cause + problems for the DVI LATEX format) and it also means that the user supplied + material can include a hyperlink to another location. The name key is obtained + from \glsxtrshortlongname.
      short-postlong-user-desc
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s - like the above
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the + above short-postlong-user style but the style but the description must be - specified. + id="dx1-24199"> must be specified. The name + is obtained from \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname.
      long-postshort-user
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the above short-postlong-user style but the long form is shown first and + id="dx1-24202"> style but the long form is shown first and the short form is in the parenthetical material (as for long-short-user) + id="dx1-24203">) style.
      long-postshort-user-desc
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s - like the above
      This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the + above long-postshort-user style but the style but the description must be - specified. + id="dx1-24206"> must be specified. The name + is obtained from \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname.
      long-hyphen-short-hyphen
      This style (new to v1.17) is designed to work with the markwords category attribute. The full form is formatted + id="dx1-24209"> category attribute. The full form is formatted using -



      \glsxtrlonghyphenshort  \glsxtrlonghyphenshort{label}{}

      -

      +

      where ⟨insert⟩ is the inserted material provided in the final optional argument of commands like \insert. If ⟨insert⟩ start with a hyphen, then this locally redefines \glsxtrwordsep to a hyphen, which means that if the to a hyphen, which means that if the markwords - attribute is set then the long form will become hyphenated. (If this - attribute isn’t set, there’s no alteration to the way the long form is - displayed.) -

      Unlike the other ⟨ + attribute is set then the long form will become hyphenated. (If this attribute + isn’t set, there’s no alteration to the way the long form is displayed.) The name + key is obtained from \glsxtrlongshortname. +

      Unlike the other ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩) type of styles, such as long-short, this style also + id="dx1-24214">, this style also repeats the insertion in the parenthetical part, so that the first use form is:

      -

      \glsfirstlonghyphenfont{long}\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{short}insert⟩)

      -

      The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by +

      The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by \glsxtrfullsep{labelinsert⟩ may be moved into the formatting commands according to the conditional \ifglsxtrinsertinside. -

      For example, if

      For example, if ip is defined using:

      -
      +
      \glssetcategoryattribute{english}{markwords}{true}  
      \setabbreviationstyle[english]{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}  
      \newabbreviation[category=english]{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}
      -

      then +

      then

      -
      +
      \gls{ip}[-Adressen]
      -

      will do +

      will do

      -

      Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

      -

      on first use, whereas +

      Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

      +

      on first use, whereas

      -
      +
      \gls{ip}[ Address]
      -

      will do +

      will do

      -

      Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)

      -

      on first use. -

      Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like +

      Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)

      +

      on first use. +

      Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like \glsxtrlong. This means that

      -
      +
      \glsxtrlong{ip}[-Adressen]
      -

      will do +

      will do

      -

      Internet Protocol-Adressen

      +

      Internet Protocol-Adressen

      -

      -

      If the

      +

      If the markwords attribute hadn’t been set, then the first use of + id="dx1-24215"> attribute hadn’t been set, then the first use of

      -
      +
      \gls{ip}[-Adressen]
      -

      would do +

      would do

      -

      Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

      -

      instead. -

      If the inserted material ⟨

      Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

      +

      instead. +

      If the inserted material ⟨insert⟩ is likely to contain commands like \gls, then use long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen instead to avoid nested links. + id="dx1-24216"> instead to avoid nested links.
      -

      -

      If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine +

      +

      If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine \glsabbrvhyphenfont and \glsxtrhyphensuffix to use the small-caps @@ -9796,58 +10082,65 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhyphensuffix to use the small-caps

      -
      +
      \renewcommand{\glsabbrvhyphenfont}{\glsabbrvscfont}  
      \renewcommand{\glsxtrhyphensuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}
      -

      Similarly for other font-changing variations. +

      Similarly for other font-changing variations.

      long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg
      New to version 1.17, this style is like long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc except that the parenthetical part is omitted and + id="dx1-24218"> except that the parenthetical part is omitted and the long form is displayed on subsequent use. The short form can be accessed with \glsxtrshort but just uses the default abbreviation font. There’s no - regular version of this style as the regular form doesn’t have the flexibility to - deal with the hyphen switch. +class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort but just uses the default abbreviation font. There’s + no regular version of this style as the regular form doesn’t have the + flexibility to deal with the hyphen switch. The name is obtained from + \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname.
      long-hyphen-noshort-noreg
      New to version 1.17, this style is like long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg but the name is set to the short form and the + id="dx1-24221"> but the name is set to the short form and the description is set to the long form.
      long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc
      -

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-short-hyphen but the user - supplies the description. + id="dx1-24223"> but the user + supplies the description. The name is obtained from \glsxtrlongshortdescname.

      long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen
      -

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-short-hyphen but the + id="dx1-24226"> but the inserted and parenthetical material are moved to the post-link hook. On first use, \gls{}insert
      where -



      \glsxtrposthyphenshort  \glsxtrposthyphenshort{label}insert

      -

      +

      is in the post-link hook. This uses the format:
      insert⟩ (isnert⟩) -

      The singular short form is always used here, even with

      The singular short form is always used here, even with \glspl. (Unlike long-hyphen-long-hyphen.)
      -

      -

      The part in the link-text on first use: -


      .)
      +

      +

      The part in the link-text on first use: +


      \glsxtrlonghyphen  \glsxtrlonghyphen{long}{}{insert}

      -

      +

      checks if ⟨insert⟩ starts with a hyphen. If it does, then \glsxtrwordsep is locally @@ -9924,15 +10217,15 @@ class="cmti-10">insert⟩ for this style without causing nested hyperlinks, but only for commands like \gls. -

      Don’t use

      Don’t use \gls in the ⟨insert⟩ part for commands like \glsxtrfull, \glsxtrshort or \glsxtrlong.
      -

      -

      The inline full display format used by commands like

      +

      The inline full display format used by commands like \glsxtrfull behaves differently to the first use of \gls with this style. It’s better @@ -9947,28 +10240,32 @@ class="cmtt-10">} if you want to ensure the full long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen-desc

      -

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen but the - user supplies the description. + id="dx1-24231"> + but the user supplies the description. The name is obtained from + \glsxtrlongshortdescname.

      short-hyphen-long-hyphen
      This style (new to v1.17) is like long-hyphen-short-hyphen, + id="dx1-24234">, except that the short form is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. The full form is formatted using -



      \glsxtrshorthyphenlong  \glsxtrshorthyphenlong{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{insert}

      -

      +

      which behaves in an analogous way to \glsxtrlonghyphenshort. +class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlonghyphenshort. The name is + obtained from \glsxtrshortlongname.

      short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc
      -

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to short-hyphen-long-hyphen but the user - supplies the description. + id="dx1-24238"> but the user + supplies the description. The name is obtained from \glsxtrshortlongdescname. @@ -10001,12 +10305,12 @@ class="cmss-10">short-hyphen-long-hyphenshort-hyphen-postlong-hyphen

      This style (new to v1.17) is like long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen, but the short form is displayed first followed by + id="dx1-24241">, but the short form is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. On first use, \gls{label}insert
      where -



      \glsxtrposthyphenlong  \glsxtrposthyphenlong{label}insert

      -

      +

      is in the post-link hook. These commands behave in an analogous manner to those used with long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen. -

      Don’t use . The name is obtained from + \glsxtrshortlongname. +

      Don’t use \gls in the ⟨insert⟩ part for commands like \glsxtrfull, \glsxtrshort or \glsxtrlong.
      -

      -

      The inline full display format used by commands like

      +

      The inline full display format used by commands like \glsxtrfull behaves differently to the first use of \gls with this style. It’s better @@ -10067,22 +10375,26 @@ class="cmtt-10">} if you want to ensure the full short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen-desc

      -

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to

      New to version 1.17. This is similar to short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen but the - user supplies the description. + id="dx1-24246"> + but the user supplies the description. The name is obtained from + \glsxtrshortlongdescname.

      -

      +

      -

      Top

      3.5 Defining New Abbreviation Styles

      -

      New abbreviation styles may be defined using: -


      New abbreviation styles may be defined using: +


      \newabbreviationstyle  }{fmts}

      -

      -

      where ⟨

      + + + +

      where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the new style (as used in the mandatory argument of \setabbreviationstyleglossaries package’s \newacronymstyle command. - - - -

      You can’t use styles defined by

      You can’t use styles defined by \newacronymstyle with glossaries-extra unless you have reverted glossaries package can’t be used with abbreviations defined with \newabbreviation.
      -

      -

      The ⟨

      +

      The ⟨setup⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is defined and may set attributes for the given abbreviation category. This argument should redefine -



      \CustomAbbreviationFields  \CustomAbbreviationFields

      -

      +

      to set the entry fields including the name (defaults to the short form if omitted), @@ -10149,12 +10461,12 @@ class="cmss-10">pluraldescription. -

      \CustomAbbreviationFields is expanded by \newabbreviation so take care to protect commands that shouldn’t be expanded.
      -

      -

      For example, the

      +

      For example, the long-short style has the following in ⟨setup⟩:

      -
      +
        \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{%  
          name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}},  
          sort={\the\glsshorttok}, @@ -10176,14 +10488,14 @@ class="cmti-10">setup⟩:  
          plural={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshortpltok}},%  
          description={\the\glslongtok}}%
      -

      Note that the

      Note that the first and firstplural are set even though they’re not used by \gls. -

      The basic styles, such as

      The basic styles, such as long-short, use commands like fmts⟩ argument even if they’re not used within \CustomAbbreviationFields. -

      The ⟨

      The ⟨setup⟩ argument may also redefine -



      \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation  \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation

      -

      +

      which can be used to assign attributes. (This will automatically be initialised to do nothing.) -

      For example, the

      For example, the short-footnote includes the following in ⟨setup⟩:

      -
      +
        \renewcommand*{\GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation}{%  
          \glssetattribute{\the\glslabeltok}{nohyperfirst}{true}%  
          \glshasattribute{\the\glslabeltok}{regular}% @@ -10230,7 +10542,7 @@ class="cmti-10">setup⟩:  
          {}%  
        }%
      -

      This sets the

      This sets the nohyperfirst attribute to “true”. It also unsets the nohyperfirst attribute doesn’t get unset by other styles, so take care not to switch styles for the same category. -

      You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the +

      You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the following token registers. -

      Short value (defined by

      Short value (defined by glossaries): -



      \glsshorttok  \glsshorttok

      -

      -

      Short plural value (defined by

      +

      Short plural value (defined by glossaries-extra): -



      \glsshortpltok  \glsshortpltok

      -

      +

      (This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user through the shortplural key in the optional argument of \newabbreviation.) -

      Long value (defined by

      Long value (defined by glossaries): -



      \glslongtok  \glslongtok

      -

      -

      Long plural value (defined by

      +

      Long plural value (defined by glossaries-extra): -



      \glslongpltok  \glslongpltok

      -

      +

      (This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user through the longplural key in the optional argument of \newabbreviation.) -

      The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as

      The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as markwords). The @@ -10296,19 +10608,19 @@ above registers reflect the modification. If you want to access the original (unmodified) short or long form (as provided in the final two arguments of \newabbreviation), then use the commands: -



      \glsxtrorgshort  \glsxtrorgshort

      -

      +

      for the short form and -



      \glsxtrorglong  \glsxtrorglong

      -

      +

      for the long form. (These may be useful for the sort key to avoid any formatting that @@ -10316,44 +10628,44 @@ class="cmss-10">sort

      There are two other registers available that are defined by

      There are two other registers available that are defined by glossaries: -



      \glslabeltok  \glslabeltok

      -

      +

      which contains the entry’s label and -



      \glskeylisttok  \glskeylisttok

      -

      +

      which contains the values provided in the optional argument of \newabbreviation. -

      Remember put

      Remember put \the in front of the register command as in the examples above. The category label can be access through the command (not a register): -



      \glscategorylabel  \glscategorylabel

      -

      +

      This may be used inside the definition of \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation. -

      If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use -


      If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use +


      \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup  \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{name}

      -

      +

      where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the -

      +
      \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{long-noshort-desc}
      -

      within ⟨

      within ⟨setup⟩. -

      The ⟨

      The ⟨fmts⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is displayed in the document. This argument should redefine the following commands. -

      The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the

      The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the shortplural key): -



      \abbrvpluralsuffix  \abbrvpluralsuffix

      -

      +

      (Note that this isn’t used for the plural long form, which just uses the regular \glspluralsuffix.) -

      The font used for the short form on

      The font used for the short form on first use or in the full forms: -



      \glsfirstabbrvfont  \glsfirstabbrvfont{text}

      -

      -

      The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like +

      +

      The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like \glsxtrshort: -



      \glsabbrvfont  \glsabbrvfont{text}

      -

      -

      The font used for the long form on

      +

      The font used for the long form on first use or in the full forms: -



      \glsfirstlongfont  \glsfirstlongfont{text}

      -

      -

      The font used for the long form in commands like

      +

      The font used for the long form in commands like \glsxtrlong use: -



      \glslongfont  \glslongfont{text}

      -

      -

      Display full form singular no case-change (used by

      +

      Display full form singular no case-change (used by \gls on first use for @@ -10436,7 +10748,7 @@ abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



      \glsxtrfullformat  label}{insert}

      -

      -

      Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by

      +

      Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by \Gls on \Glsregular attribute set): -



      \Glsxtrfullformat  label}{insert}

      -

      -

      Display full form plural no case-change (used by

      +

      Display full form plural no case-change (used by \glspl on first use for @@ -10472,7 +10784,7 @@ abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



      \glsxtrfullplformat  }

      -

      -

      Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by

      +

      Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glspl on first use for abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



      \Glsxtrfullplformat  label}{insert}

      -

      -

      In addition ⟨

      +

      In addition ⟨fmts⟩ may also redefine the following commands that govern the inline full formats. If the style doesn’t redefine them, they will default to the same as the display full forms. -

      Inline singular no case-change (used by

      Inline singular no case-change (used by \glsentryfull, \glsxtrfull\glsxtrfull\GLSxtrfull): -



      \glsxtrinlinefullformat  }{insert}

      -

      -

      Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by

      +

      Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glsentryfull and \Glsxtrfull): -



      \Glsxtrinlinefullformat  }{insert}

      -

      -

      Inline plural no case-change (used by

      +

      Inline plural no case-change (used by \glsentryfullpl, \glsxtrfullpl\glsxtrfullpl\GLSxtrfullpl): -



      \glsxtrinlinefullplformat  }{insert}

      -

      -

      Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by

      +

      Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glsentryfullpl and \Glsxtrfullpl): -



      \Glsxtrinlinefullplformat  }{insert}

      -

      -

      (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is +

      +

      (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is formatted by redefining the following four commands, but these won’t be used for abbreviations with the regular attribute set. If the style doesn’t redefine these commands, the default values are used. -

      Singular with no case-change: -


      Singular with no case-change: +


      \glsxtrsubsequentfmt  label}{insert}

      -

      -

      Singular with first letter upper case: -


      +

      Singular with first letter upper case: +


      \Glsxtrsubsequentfmt  label}{insert}

      -

      +

      -

      Plural with no case-change: -


      Plural with no case-change: +


      \glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  }{insert}

      -

      -

      Plural with first letter upper case: -


      +

      Plural with first letter upper case: +


      \Glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  }{insert}

      -

      -

      If you want to provide support for

      +

      If you want to provide support for glossaries-accsupp use the following glossaries-accsupp\glsentry⟨xxx⟩ command.) -

      For example, the

      For example, the short-long style has the following in ⟨fmts⟩:

      -
      +
        \renewcommand*{\abbrvpluralsuffix}{\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix}%  
        \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvfont}[1]{\glsabbrvdefaultfont{##1}}%  
        \renewcommand*{\glsfirstabbrvfont}[1]{\glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont{##1}}% @@ -10693,17 +11005,17 @@ class="cmti-10">fmts⟩:  
          \glsxtrparen{\glsfirstlongfont{\glsaccesslongpl{##1}}}%  
        }%
      -

      Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the +

      Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the display versions. -

      If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use -


      If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use +


      \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts  \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{name}

      -

      +

      within ⟨fmts⟩, where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the @@ -10716,11 +11028,11 @@ class="cmti-10">fmts⟩:

      -
      +
        \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{long-short}%
      -

      -

      Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on

      +

      Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on long-short that displays @@ -10730,7 +11042,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\textsf:

      -
      +
      \newabbreviationstyle  
      {custom-sf}% label  
      {% setup @@ -10741,7 +11053,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\textsf:  
        \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvfont}[1]{\textsf{##1}}%  
      }
      -

      Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions +

      Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions such as short-sc-longshort-long\glsabbrvfont etc which makes them easier to adapt than the modified styles. -

      For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code +

      For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code (glossaries-extra-code.pdf).

      -

      -

      +

      Top

      4. Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents

      -

      The

      The glossaries user manual cautions against using commands like \gls in chapter or section titles. The principle problems are:

      @@ -10799,9 +11111,9 @@ class="cmss-10">hyperrefhyperref, you will end up with nested hyperlinks in the table of contents.
    -

    Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark +

    Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark issues). -

    To get around all these problems, the

    To get around all these problems, the glossaries user manual recommends using the expandable non-hyperlink commands, such as \glsentrytext -

    +
    \chapter{A Chapter about \glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}
    -

    Or, if you are using

    Or, if you are using hyperref:

    -
    +
    \chapter{A Chapter about  
    \texorpdfstring{\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}{\glsentryshort{html}}}
    -

    -

    Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do +

    +

    Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do this for you. However, if you have mixed styles this won’t work as commands like \gls and \MakeUppercase. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package tries to resolve this by modifying \markright and @@ -10867,12 +11179,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">\markboth and \@starttoc. If you don’t like this change, you can restore their former definitions using -



    \glsxtrRevertMarks  \glsxtrRevertMarks

    -

    +

    In this case, you’ll have to use the glossaries manual’s recommendations of either simply using -

    +
    \chapter[A Chapter about \glsentryshort{html}]{A Chapter about \gls{html}}
    -

    Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert

    Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert \glsxtrmarkhook and \@glsxtrinmark at the start of the header or table of contents either scoped or afterwards cancelled with \@glsxtrnotinmark and \glsxtrrestoremarkhook. -

    If you don’t revert the mark commands back with

    If you don’t revert the mark commands back with \glsxtrRevertMarks, you can use the commands described below in the argument of sectioning commands. You can still use them even if the mark commands have been reverted, but only where they don’t conflict with the page style. -

    The commands listed below all use

    The commands listed below all use \texorpdfstring if hyperref

    These commands essentially behave as though you have used

    These commands essentially behave as though you have used \glsxtrshort (or equivalent) with the options noindexheaduc attribute to “true” for the appropriate category. -

    If you use one of the

    If you use one of the \textsc styles, be aware that the default fonts don’t provide bold small-caps or italic small-caps. This means that if the chapter @@ -10938,239 +11250,239 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont. You may want to consider using the slantsc package in this case.
    -

    -

    Display the short form: -


    +

    Display the short form: +


    \glsfmtshort  \glsfmtshort{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural short form: -


    +

    Display the plural short form: +


    \glsfmtshortpl  \glsfmtshortpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular short form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular short form: +


    \Glsfmtshort  \Glsfmtshort{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural short form: +

    First letter upper case plural short form: -



    \Glsfmtshortpl  \Glsfmtshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    Display the long form: -


    Display the long form: +


    \glsfmtlong  \glsfmtlong{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural long form: -


    +

    Display the plural long form: +


    \glsfmtlongpl  \glsfmtlongpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular long form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular long form: +


    \Glsfmtlong  \Glsfmtlong{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural long form: -


    First letter upper case plural long form: +


    \Glsfmtlongpl  \Glsfmtlongpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the

    There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the inline full form, which may be different from the full form used by \gls. -

    Display the full form: -


    Display the full form: +


    \glsfmtfull  \glsfmtfull{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural full form: -


    +

    Display the plural full form: +


    \glsfmtfullpl  \glsfmtfullpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular full form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular full form: +


    \Glsfmtfull  \Glsfmtfull{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural full form: -


    First letter upper case plural full form: +


    \Glsfmtfullpl  \Glsfmtfullpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    There are also equivalent commands for the value of the

    There are also equivalent commands for the value of the text field: -



    \glsfmttext  \glsfmttext{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmttext  \Glsfmttext{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    The plural equivalents: +

    The plural equivalents: -



    \glsfmtplural  \glsfmtplural{label}

    -

    +

    and -



    \Glsfmtplural  \Glsfmtplural{label}

    -

    -

    Likewise for the value of the

    +

    Likewise for the value of the name field: -



    \glsfmtname  \glsfmtname{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmtname  \Glsfmtname{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    Similarly for the value of the

    Similarly for the value of the first field: -



    \glsfmtfirst  \glsfmtfirst{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmtfirst  \Glsfmtfirst{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    The plural equivalents: -


    The plural equivalents: +


    \glsfmtfirstpl  \glsfmtfirstpl{label}

    -

    +

    and -



    \Glsfmtfirstpl  \Glsfmtfirstpl{label}

    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    5. Categories

    -

    Each entry defined by

    Each entry defined by \newglossaryentry (or commands that internally use it such as babel shorthands on that make some characters active.) -

    The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed +

    The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed in the text or glossary. Note that an entry’s category is independent of the glossary type. Be careful not to confuse category with type. -

    The default category assumed by

    The default category assumed by \newglossaryentry is labelled general. @@ -11204,7 +11516,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newacronym have the category set to acronym by default. -

    Additionally, if you have enabled

    Additionally, if you have enabled \newterm with the numbersnumber. -

    You can obtain the category label for a given entry using -


    You can obtain the category label for a given entry using +


    \glscategory  \glscategory{label}

    -

    +

    This is equivalent to commands like \glsentryname and so may be used in an expandable context. No error is generated if the entry doesn’t exist. -

    You can test the category for a given entry using -


    You can test the category for a given entry using +


    \glsifcategory  part}{false part}

    -

    +

    This is equivalent to

    }
    so any restrictions that apply to \ifglsfieldeq also apply to \glsifcategory. -

    Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the

    Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the general and acronym\glsentryfmt to determine whether to use \glsgenentryfmt or \glsxtrgenabbrvfmt. -

    Other attributes recognised by

    Other attributes recognised by glossaries-extra are:

    nohyperfirst attribute then just redefine -



    \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst  \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst{label}

    -

    +

    to do nothing.

    non-plural commands like \gls or \glstext. (Provided for entries such as abbreviations that end with a full stop.) -

    Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a +

    Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a full stop. For example:

    -
    +
    \newabbreviation  
     [user1={German Speaking \TeX\ User Group}]  
     {dante}{DANTE e.V.}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\  
    e.V.}
    -

    Here the

    Here the short and longuser1 -

    +
    \glsuseri{dante}[.]
    -

    This will bring the punctuation character inside the

    This will bring the punctuation character inside the link-text and it won’t be discarded. @@ -11474,40 +11786,40 @@ class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” any entry def class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation will automatically have spaces in the long form replaced with -



    \glsxtrwordsep  \glsxtrwordsep

    -

    +

    and each word is encapsulated with -



    \glsxtrword  \glsxtrword{word}

    -

    +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{markwords}{true}  
    \newabbreviation{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}
    -

    is essentially the same as +

    is essentially the same as

    -
    +
    \newabbreviation{ip}{IP}  
    {\glsxtrword{Internet}\glsxtrwordsep\glsxtrword{Protocol}}
    -

    The “hyphen” styles, such as

    The “hyphen” styles, such as long-hyphen-short-hyphen, take advantage of this @@ -11525,19 +11837,19 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong. You can provide your own

    -
    +
    \newcommand{\hyplong}[2][]{%  
     {\def\glsxtrwordsep{-}\glsxtrlong[#1]{#2}}}
    -

    -

    This setting will also adjust the long plural. -

    This setting may result in the

    +

    This setting will also adjust the long plural. +

    This setting may result in the \glsxtrword and \glsxtrwordsep markup ending up in the sort field, depending on the style in use.
    -

    +

    markwords but applies to the short form. (Only useful for abbreviations that contain spaces.) -

    This setting will only adjust the short plural if the

    This setting will only adjust the short plural if the shortplural key isn’t used. This setting will take precedence over insertdots. -

    This setting may result in the

    This setting may result in the \glsxtrword and \glsxtrwordsep markup ending up in the sort field, depending on the style in use.
    -

    +

    markshortwords. -

    If you explicitly override the short plural using the

    If you explicitly override the short plural using the shortplural key, you must explicitly insert the dots yourself (since there’s no way for the code to determine if the plural has a suffix that shouldn’t be followed by a dot).
    -

    -

    This attribute is best used with the

    +

    This attribute is best used with the discardperiod attribute set to “true”. @@ -11681,7 +11993,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifcounttrigger\cgls should behave. -

    With

    With glossaries, commands like \cgls use \cglsformat only if the previous @@ -11719,7 +12031,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\capitalisewordsmfirstuc). If you want to use a different command you can redefine: -



    \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs  \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs{phrase cs}

    -

    +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \newcommand*{\glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs}[1]{\xcapitalisefmtwords*{#1}}
    -

    (Note that the argument to

    (Note that the argument to \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs will be a control sequence whose replacement text is the entry’s description, which is why \xcapitalisefmtwords is needed instead of \capitalisefmtwords.)

-

Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design +

Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design limitations for both the first letter uppercasing and the title casing commands. See the mfirstuc\glossentrydesc +

-

+

\glossentryname +
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{glossnamefont}{emph}
-

Note that this overrides

Note that this overrides \glsnamefont which will only be used if this attribute hasn’t been set. -

Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change, +

Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change, such as the list styles which put the name in the optional argument of \item. @@ -11881,10 +12193,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls will be set to the -

+
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}
-

(See also the accompanying sample file

(See also the accompanying sample file sample-external.tex.) If the URL contains awkward characters (such as % or \glspercentchar and \glstildechar that expand to literal characters. -

If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding +

If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding #name⟩ to the URL), then you also need to set \glslabel within ⟨name⟩ which is set by commands like \gls to the entry’s label. -

All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with

All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with \glstarget which sets the anchor to \glolinkprefix\glslabel, so if you want @@ -11921,13 +12233,13 @@ class="cmss-10">targeturl -

+
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{\glolinkprefix\glslabel}
-

(If the target document changed

(If the target document changed \glolinkprefix then you will need to adjust the above as appropriate.) -

If the anchor is in the form ⟨

If the anchor is in the form ⟨name1.name2⟩ then use targetcategory for the ⟨name1⟩ part. -

For example: +

For example:

-
+
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}  
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetcategory}{page}  
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{7}
-

will cause all link text for

will cause all link text for general entries to link to master-doc.pdf#page.7 (page 7 of that PDF). -

If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal +

If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal glossary and entries that link to an external URL then you can use the starred form of \newignoredglossary\newignoredglossary -

+ -

+

-

An attribute can be set using: -


An attribute can be set using: +


\glssetcategoryattribute  attribute-label}{value}

-

+

where ⟨category-label⟩ is the category label, ⟨attribute-label⟩ is the attribute label and ⟨value⟩ is the new value for the attribute. -

There is a shortcut version to set the

There is a shortcut version to set the regular attribute to “true”: -



\glssetregularcategory  \glssetregularcategory{category-label}

-

-

If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the +

+

If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the shortcut command: -



\glssetattribute  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨value}

-

+

This uses \glssetcategoryattribute with \glscategory to set the attribute. Note that this will affect all other entries that share this entry’s category. -

You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using: -


You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using: +


\glsgetcategoryattribute  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨attribute-label}

-

+

Again there is a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label for a given entry: -



\glsgetattribute  } -

-

You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using: -


+

You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using: +


\glshascategoryattribute  true code}{false code}

-

+

This uses etoolbox’s true code⟩ if the attribute has been set and isn’t blank and isn’t \relax. The shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from an entry is: -



\glshasattribute  code}{false code}

-

-

You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using: -


+

You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using: +


\glsifcategoryattribute  true-part}{false-part}

-

+

This tests if the attribute (given by ⟨attribute-label⟩) for the category (given by ⟨true-part⟩ is done. If the attribute isn’t set or is set but isn’t equal to ⟨value⟩, ⟨false part⟩ is done. -

For example: +

For example:

-
+
\glsifcategoryattribute{general}{nohyper}{true}{NO HYPER}{HYPER}
-

This does “NO HYPER” if the

This does “NO HYPER” if the general category has the nohyper attribute set to true otherwise if does “HYPER”. -

With boolean-style attributes like

With boolean-style attributes like nohyper, make sure you always test for true not false in case the attribute hasn’t been set. -

Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular +

Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular entry: -



\glsifattribute  true-part} {false-part}

-

-

There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the

+

There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the regular attribute set to “true”: -



\glsifregularcategory  true-part}{false-part}

-

+

Alternatively, if you need to lookup the category for a particular entry: -



\glsifregular  }{false-part}

-

+

Note that if the regularregular attribute has been set to “false”: -



\glsifnotregularcategory  true-part}{false-part}

-

+

or for a particular entry: -



\glsifnotregular  }{false-part}

-

+

Again, if the regular attribute hasn’t been set, the above do ⟨false-part⟩, so these reverse commands aren’t logically opposite in the strict sense. -

You can iterate through all entries with a given category using: -


You can iterate through all entries with a given category using: +


\glsforeachincategory[glossary-labels]{label-cs}{body}

-

+

This iterates through all entries in the glossaries identified by the comma-separated list ⟨glossary-labels⟩ that have the category given by ⟨

Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given +

Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given attribute using: -



\glsforeachwithattribute  }{body}

-

+

This will do ⟨body⟩ for each entry that has a category with the attribute ⟨attribute-label⟩ set to ⟨attribute-value⟩. The remaining arguments are as the previous command. -

You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary +

You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary field changing commands, such as \glsfielddef. Alternatively, you can use -



\glsxtrsetcategory  }{category-label}

-

+

This will change the category to ⟨category-label⟩ for each entry listed in the comma-separated list ⟨\glsfieldxdef so it will expand ⟨category-label⟩ and make the change global. -

You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries +

You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries using: -



\glsxtrsetcategoryforall  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨category-label}

-

+

where ⟨glossary-labels⟩ is a comma-separated list of glossary labels.

-

-

+

Top

6. Entry Counting

-

As mentioned in

As mentioned in §2.4 Entry Counting Modifications, §5 Categories). -

Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used +

Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used by commands that change the first use flag. (That is, all those commands that mark the entry as having been used.) There are many commands that don’t modify this flag and they won’t contribute to the entry use count.
-

-

With

+

With glossaries-extra, you may use \cgls instead of shortcuts=ac). -

All upper case versions (not provided by

All upper case versions (not provided by glossaries) are also available: -



\cGLS  label}[insert]

-

+

and -



\cGLSpl  label}[insert]

-

+

These are analogous to \cgls and \cglspl but they use -



\cGLSformat  label}{insert}

-

+

and -



\cGLSplformat  label}{insert}

-

+

which convert the analogous \cglsformat and \cglsplformat to upper case. -

Just using

Just using glossaries:

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage{glossaries}  
\makeglossaries @@ -12488,8 +12800,8 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries:  
\printglossaries  
\end{document}
-

-

If you switch to

+

If you switch to glossaries-extra you must set the entrycountentrycount -

+ -

-

When activated with

+

When activated with \glsenableentrycount, commands such as \cgls now use -



\glsxtrifcounttrigger  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨normal code}

-

+

to determine if the entry trips the entry count trigger. The ⟨trigger code⟩ uses commands like trigger code⟩ but the usual \gls behaviour in ⟨normal code⟩). -

The default definition is: +

The default definition is:

-
+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrifcounttrigger}[3]{%  
 \glshasattribute{#1}{entrycount}%  
 {% @@ -12565,7 +12877,7 @@ class="cmti-10">normal code⟩).  
 {#3}%  
}
-

This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the

This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the entrycount @@ -12573,17 +12885,17 @@ attribute then the ⟨trigger code⟩ will be used if the previous count value (the number of times the entry was used on the last run) is greater than the value of the attribute. -

For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than +

For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than four:

-
+
\glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{entrycount}{4}
-

-

There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the +

+

There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the entrycount\gls, etc to use \cgls etc: -



\GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨value}

-

+

The first argument ⟨categories⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories. For each category, the value⟩. In addition, this does:

-
+
\renewcommand*{\gls}{\cgls}%  
\renewcommand*{\Gls}{\cGls}%  
\renewcommand*{\glspl}{\cglspl}% @@ -12623,19 +12935,19 @@ class="cmti-10">value⟩. In addition, this does:  
\renewcommand*{\GLS}{\cGLS}%  
\renewcommand*{\GLSpl}{\cGLSpl}%
-

This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents. -

If you use

This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents. +

If you use \GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting more than once, subsequent uses will just set the entrycount attribute for each listed category. -

The above example document can then become: +

The above example document can then become:

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
\makeglossaries @@ -12648,12 +12960,12 @@ class="cmss-10">entrycount\printglossaries  
\end{document}
-

-

The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times +

+

The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times an entry has been marked as used throughout the document. (The reset commands will reset the total back to zero.) If you prefer to count per sectional-unit, you can use -



\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting  value}{counter-name}

-

+

where ⟨categories⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories to which this feature should be applied, ⟨value⟩ is the trigger value and ⟨counter-name⟩ is the name of the counter used by the sectional unit. -

Due to the asynchronous nature of T

Due to the asynchronous nature of TEX’s output routine, discrepancies will occur in page spanning paragraphs if you use the page counter.
-

-

Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit +

+

Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit counting in the same document. -

The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that

The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that \thecounter-name⟩ needs to be expandable. Since \theHcounter-name⟩ if it exists otherwise it will use \thecounter-name⟩. -

The per-unit counting function uses two attributes:

The per-unit counting function uses two attributes: entrycount (as before) and @@ -12707,58 +13019,58 @@ class="cmss-10">unitcount

Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting +

Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting mechanism provide a command that can be used to access the current count value for this run: -



\glsentrycurrcount  \glsentrycurrcount{label}

-

+

and the final value from the previous run: -



\glsentryprevcount  \glsentryprevcount{label}

-

+

In the case of the per-unit counting, this is the final value for the current unit. In both commands ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. -

The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides: -


The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides: +


\glsentryprevtotalcount  \glsentryprevtotalcount{label}

-

+

which gives the sum of all the per-unit totals from the previous run for the entry given by ⟨label⟩, and -



\glsentryprevmaxcount  \glsentryprevmaxcount{label}

-

+

which gives the maximum per-unit total from the previous run. -

The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting. -

Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter: +

The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting. +

Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter:

-
+
\documentclass{report}  
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting{abbreviation}{2}{chapter} @@ -12777,7 +13089,7 @@ which gives the maximum per-unit total from the previous run.  
\printglossaries  
\end{document}
-

In this document, the

In this document, the css entry is used three times in the first chapter. This is more than the trigger value of 2, so \gls{css} is expanded on \gls{css} doesn’t get a line added to the glossary file. -

The

The html is used a total of three times, but the expansion and indexing suppression trigger is tripped in both chapters because the per-unit total (1 for the first chapter and 2 for the second chapter) is less than or equal to the trigger value. -

The

The sample entry has only been used once, but it doesn’t trip the indexing suppression because it’s in the general category, which hasn’t been listed in \GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting. -

The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following +

The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following @@ -12812,19 +13124,19 @@ won’t be triggered, but the unit entry count is used to automatically supp hyperlink for commands like \gls by modifying the hook -



\glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook  \glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook

-

+

which is used at the end of the macro the determines whether or not to suppress the hyperlink.

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}  
\usepackage{glossaries-extra} @@ -12845,10 +13157,10 @@ hyperlink.  
\printglossaries  
\end{document}
-

This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of

This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of \gls{sample} on each page. -

The earlier warning about using the

The earlier warning about using the page counter still applies. If the first instance of -

-

+

Top

7. Auto-Indexing

-

It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary, +

It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary, and you may want entries to automatically be added to the index (as in this document). There are two attributes that govern this: indexnamedualindex. -

The

The \glsxtrpostnamehook macro, used at the end of \glossentrynamename key. -

The internal macro used by the

The internal macro used by the glossaries package to write the information to the external glossary file is modified to check for the dualindex attribute. -

In both cases, the indexing is done through -


In both cases, the indexing is done through +


\glsxtrdoautoindexname  }{attribute-label}

-

+

This uses the standard \index command with the sort value taken from the entry’s @@ -12920,30 +13232,30 @@ class="cmti-10">label⟩}. As from v1.16, there are user-level commands available to change the sort and actual value used by the automated index. -

The actual value is given by -


The actual value is given by +


\glsxtrautoindexentry  \glsxtrautoindexentry{label}

-

+

where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. The default definition is:

-
+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryname{#1}}
-

Note the use of

Note the use of \string to prevent \glsentryname from being expanded as it’s written to the index file. -

The sort value is assigned using: -


The sort value is assigned using: +


\glsxtrautoindexassignsort  }{label}

-

+

where ⟨label⟩ is the entry label and ⟨cs⟩ is the command which needs to be set to the @@ -12962,36 +13274,36 @@ sort value. The default definition is:

-
+
\newcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexassignsort}[2]{%  
  \glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}%  
}
-

After this macro is called, ⟨

After this macro is called, ⟨cs⟩ is then processed to escape any of makeindex’s special characters. Note that this escaping is only performed on the sort not on the actual value. -

The command used to perform the actual indexing is: -


The command used to perform the actual indexing is: +


\glsxtrautoindex  \glsxtrautoindex{text}

-

+

This just does \index{text} by default. -

The entry’s

The entry’s parent field isn’t referenced in this automated indexing.
-

-

For example, to index the value of the

+

For example, to index the value of the first key, instead of the namename -

+
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryfirst{#1}}
-

and if the sort value also needs to be set to the

and if the sort value also needs to be set to the long field, if present, otherwise the sort -

+
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexassignsort}[2]{%  
  \ifglshaslong{#2}%  
  {\glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{long}}%  
  {\glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}}%  
}
-

-

If the value of the attribute given by ⟨

+

If the value of the attribute given by ⟨attribute-label⟩ is “true”, no encap will be added, otherwise the encap will be the attribute value. For example:

-
+
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{indexname}{textbf}
-

will set the encap to

will set the encap to textbf which will display the relevant page number in bold whereas

-
+
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{dualindex}{true}
-

won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index. -

The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter +

won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index. +

The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter used in the glossary. (Unless some other loaded package has modified the definition of \index to use some thing else.)
-

-

By default the

+

By default the format key won’t be used with the format key to override the attribute value by using the preamble-only command: -



\GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride  \GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride

-

+

If you use this command and hyperref has been loaded, then the \glshypernumber to allow formats that use that command. -

The

The dualindex attribute will still be used on subsequent use even if the @@ -13091,8 +13403,8 @@ class="cmss-10">dualindexnoindex key.
-

-

The

+

The \glsxtrdoautoindexname command will attempt to escape any of \makeindex\encapchar have been defined before glossaries-extra is loaded). -

If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set +

If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set the correct characters. -

Be very careful of possible shifting category codes!
-

-


Be very careful of possible shifting category codes!
+

+


\GlsXtrSetActualChar  \GlsXtrSetActualChar{char}

-

+

Set the actual character to ⟨char⟩. -



\GlsXtrSetLevelChar  \GlsXtrSetLevelChar{char}

-

+

Set the level character to ⟨char⟩. -



\GlsXtrSetEscChar  \GlsXtrSetEscChar{char}

-

+

Set the escape (quote) character to ⟨char⟩. -



\GlsXtrSetEncapChar  }

-

+

Set the encap character to ⟨char⟩.

-

-

+

Top

8. On-the-Fly Document Definitions

-

The commands described here may superficially look like ⟨

The commands described here may superficially look like ⟨word\index{word\index then just use \index.
-

-

The

+

The glossaries package advises against defining entries in the documentglossaries-extra but can be enabled using the href="#styopt.docdefs">docdefs package options. -

Although this can be problematic, the

Although this can be problematic, the glossaries-extra package provides a way of defining and using entries within the documentdocdefsThere are limitations with this approach, so take care with it. This function is disabled by default, but can be enabled using the preamble-only command: -



\GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly  \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly

-

+

When used, this defines the commands described below. -

The commands

The commands \glsxtr, \glsxtrpl, \Glsxtr and \printglossary\gls or there may be unexpected results.
-

-


+


\glsxtr  dfn-options]{label}

-

+

If an entry with the label ⟨label⟩ has already been defined, this just does \gls @@ -13270,7 +13582,7 @@ class="cmitt-10">dfn-options⟩}

-

The ⟨

The ⟨label⟩ must contain any non-expandable commands, such as formatting commands or problematic characters. If the term requires any of these, they must be omitted from the ⟨name key must be provided in the optional argument ⟨dfn-options⟩.
-

+

-

The second optional argument ⟨

The second optional argument ⟨dfn-options⟩ should be empty if the entry has already been defined, since it’s too late for them. If it’s not empty, a warning will be generated with -



\GlsXtrWarning  dfn-options}{label}

-

-

For example, this warning will be generated on the second instance of

+

For example, this warning will be generated on the second instance of \glsxtr below:

-
+
\glsxtr[][plural=geese]{goose}  
 ... later  
\glsxtr[][plural=geese]{goose}
-

-

If you are considering doing something like: +

+

If you are considering doing something like:

-
+
\newcommand*{\goose}{\glsxtr[][plural=geese]{goose}}  
\renewcommand*{\GlsXtrWarning}[2]{}  
 ... later  
\goose\ some more text here
-

then don’t bother. It’s simpler and less problematic to just define the entries in the +

then don’t bother. It’s simpler and less problematic to just define the entries in the preamble with \newglossaryentry and then use \gls in the document. -

There are plural and case-changing alternatives to

There are plural and case-changing alternatives to \glsxtr: -



\glsxtrpl  dfn-options]{label}

-

+

This is like \glsxtr but uses \glspl instead of \gls. -



\Glsxtr  dfn-options]{label}

-

+

This is like \glsxtr but uses \Gls instead of \gls. -



\Glsxtrpl  dfn-options]{label}

-

+

This is like \glsxtr but uses \Glspl instead of \gls. -

If you use UTF-8 and don’t want the inconvenient of needing to use an +

If you use UTF-8 and don’t want the inconvenient of needing to use an ASCII-only label, then it’s better to use XƎLATEX or LuaLATEX instead of LATEX (or pdfLATEX). If you really desperately want to use UTF-8 entry labels @@ -13385,20 +13697,20 @@ without switching to X\GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly that allows you to use UTF-8 characters in ⟨label⟩, but it’s experimental and may not work in some cases. -

If you use the starred version of

If you use the starred version of \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly don’t use any commands in the ⟨label⟩, even if they expand to just text.
-

+

-

-

+

Top

9. bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases

-

There is a new command line application called

There is a new command line application called bib2gls.glstex file which is loaded using \glsxtrresourcefile (or \GlsXtrLoadResources). -

This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to +

This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to maintain the database and it reduces the TEX overhead by only defining the entries that are actually required in the document. If you currently have a convertgls2bibbib2gls.) -

There are some new commands and options added to

There are some new commands and options added to glossaries-extra to help assist the integration of bib2gls into the document build process. -

An example of the contents of

An example of the contents of .bib file that stores glossary entries that can be extracted with bib2gls -

+ -

-

The follow provides some abbreviations: +

+

The follow provides some abbreviations:

-
+ -

-

Here are some symbols: +

+

Here are some symbols:

-
+
preamble{"\providecommand{\mtx}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}"}  
@symbol{M,  
  name={$\mtx{M}$}, @@ -13519,8 +13831,8 @@ preamble{"\providecommand{\mtx}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}"}  
  description={a set}  
}
-

-

To ensure that

+

To ensure that bib2glsrecord -

+
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
-

If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off, +

If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off, since bib2gls can also sort the entries and collate the locations. -

If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom +

If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom \printglossaries), but it’s a good idea to also ins id="dx1-31019">bib2gls to omit sorting to save time. -

The

The .glstex file created by \bib2gls is loaded using: -



\glsxtrresourcefile  ]{filename}

-

+

(Don’t include the file extension in ⟨filename⟩.) There’s a shortcut version (recommended over the above) that sets ⟨filename⟩ to use \jobname: -



\GlsXtrLoadResources  \GlsXtrLoadResources[options]

-

+

On the first use, this command is a shortcut for

}
where ⟨n⟩ is the current value of -



\glsxtrresourcecount

-

+

which is incremented at the end of \GlsXtrLoadResources. Any advisory notes regarding \glsxtrresourcefile also apply to \GlsXtrLoadResources. -

The

The \glsxtrresourcefile command writes the line

9.2

Since the

Since the .glstex won’t exist on the first LATEX run, the .glstex file the references should be resolved. This may cause a shift in the locations if the actual text produced once the entry is defined is larger than the placeholder ?? (as can occur with long citations). -

Note that as from v1.12,

Note that as from v1.12, \glsxtrresourcefile temporarily switches the category code of @ to 11 (letter) while it reads the file to allow for any internal commands stored in the location field.

-

Top

9.1 Selection

-

The default behaviour is for

The default behaviour is for bib2gls -

+
\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsignore}
-

at the start of the front matter and +

at the start of the front matter and

-
+
\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsnumberformat}
-

at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from +

at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from occurring in the location lists. -

Note that commands like

-

-

If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell

+

If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell bib2gls this in the @@ -13729,10 +14041,10 @@ options list. For example:

-
+
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src={terms},selection={all}]
-

This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the +

This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the .aux file. Those that don’t have any records will have an empty location list. See the .aux file. Those that don’t have any records will h href="#glo:bib2gls">bib2gls user manual for more details of this option. -

+

-

Top

9.2 Sorting and Displaying the Glossary

-

There are many sorting options provided by

There are many sorting options provided by bib2gls. The default is to sort @@ -13765,13 +14077,13 @@ example:

-
+
\GlsXtrLoadResources[  
  src=terms, % data in terms.bib  
  sort=de-DE-1996 % sort according to this locale  
]
-

The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of +

The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of symbols you may find it more appropriate to use one of the letter-base sort methods that sort according to the Unicode value of each character. See the bib2gls manual for full details of all the available sort methods. -

Since the

Since the .glstex file only defines those references required within the document (selected according to the selection option) and the definitions have been written in @@ -13794,7 +14106,7 @@ href="#sec:printunsrt">§10.2 Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing. -

Suppose the

Suppose the .bib examples shown above have been stored in the files terms.bib, EX’s path. Then the document might look like:

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}  
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc} @@ -13818,18 +14130,18 @@ class="E">EX’s path. Then the document might look like:  
\printunsrtglossaries  
\end{document}
-

The document build process (assuming the document is called

The document build process (assuming the document is called mydoc) is:

-
+
pdflatex mydoc  
bib2gls mydoc  
pdflatex mydoc
-

This creates a single glossary containing the entries:

This creates a single glossary containing the entries: bird, duck, goose, shtml. These cross-referenced entries won’t have a location list when the glossary is first displayed, but depending on how they are referenced, they may pick up a location list on the next document build. -

The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort +

The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort methods:

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage[record,abbreviations,symbols]{glossaries-extra}  
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc} @@ -13890,8 +14202,8 @@ methods:  
\printunsrtglossaries  
\end{document}
-

-

Or you can have multiple instance of

+

Or you can have multiple instance of \GlsXtrLoadResources with the same type, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-blocks. For example: @@ -13899,7 +14211,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">type, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-bloc

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage[record,style=indexgroup]{glossaries-extra}  
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc} @@ -13917,7 +14229,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">type, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-bloc  
\printunsrtglossaries  
\end{document}
-

This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the +

This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the second group has the title “Symbols” and then follow the usual letter groups. Note that for this example to work, you must run myDoc.tex:

-
+
pdflatex myDoc  
bib2gls -g myDoc  
pdflatex myDoc
-

-

You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using +

+

You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using XƎLATEX or LuaLATEX:

  class="cmtt-10">]
-

+

-

Top

9.3 Supplementary Commands

-

These commands are provided by

These commands are provided by glossaries-extra for use with bib2gls. -



\glshex  \glshex

-

+

This is just defined as \string\u, which is required when you need to indicate a Unicode character in the form \uhex⟩ in some of the resource options (as described above). -

The information provided with

The information provided with \GlsXtrLoadResources is written to the .aux file using

@@ -14234,12 +14546,12 @@ class="cmti-10">information⟩ is the information to pass to bib2gls. The command in the second argument -



\glsxtrresourceinit  \glsxtrresourceinit

-

+

may be used to temporarily redefine commands before the information is written to the file. This does nothing by default, but may be redefined to allow the use of short commands for convenience. For example, with: @@ -14247,22 +14559,22 @@ commands for convenience. For example, with:

-
+
\renewcommand{\glsxtrresourceinit}{\let\u\glshex}
-

you can just use, for example,

you can just use, for example, \uE6 instead of \string\uE6 in the custom rule. This redefinition of \u is scoped so its original definition is restored after the write operation. -

It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier +

It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier example:

-
+
\documentclass{article}  
\usepackage[record,style=indexgroup]{glossaries-extra}  
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc} @@ -14283,21 +14595,21 @@ example:  
\printunsrtglossaries  
\end{document}
-

If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom +

If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom commands that set the prefix. For example:

-
+
\newcommand*{\sym}[2][]{\gls[#1]{sym.#2}}
-

The problem with this is that the custom command

The problem with this is that the custom command \sym does allow for modifiers (such as \gls* or \gls+). Instead you can use: -



\glsxtrnewgls  prefix}{cs}

-

+

which defines the command ⟨cs⟩ that behaves like

@@ -14331,23 +14643,23 @@ class="cmtt-10">] -
+
\glsxtrnewgls{sym.}{\sym}
-

or (to default to no hyperlinks) +

or (to default to no hyperlinks)

-
+
\glsxtrnewgls[hyper=false]{sym.}{\sym}
-

now you can use

now you can use \sym+{M} to behave like \gls+{sym.M}. -

If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can +

If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can use -



\glsxtrnewglslike  }{\Glspl-like cs}

-

+

For example:

-
+
\glsxtrnewglslike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\idx}{\idxpl}{\Idx}{\Idxpl}
-

For the all caps versions: -


For the all caps versions: +


\glsxtrnewGLSlike  \GLS-like cs}{\GLSpl-like cs}

-

+

For example:

-
+
\glsxtrnewGLSlike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\IDX}{\IDXpl}
-

-

There’s an analogous command for

+

There’s an analogous command for \rgls: -



\glsxtrnewrgls  }{cs}

-

+

and for \rgls, \rglspl, \rGls and \rGlspl: -



\glsxtrnewrglslike  }{\rGlspl-like cs}

-

+

and for the all caps: -



\glsxtrnewrGLSlike  \rGLS-like cs}{\rGLSpl-like cs}

-

-

+

+

-

Top

9.4 Record Counting

-

As from version 1.1 of

As from version 1.1 of bib2glsrecordcount: set to the total number of records found for class="cmtt-10">recordcount.⟨counter⟩: set to the total number of records found for the entry for the given counter. -

If

If --record-count-unit is used then additionally:

  • location⟩: set to the total number of reco -

    Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If +

    Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If you really need it with locations that may contain formatting commands, then you can try redefining: -



    \glsxtrdetoklocation  \glsxtrdetoklocation{location}

    -

    +

    so that it detokenizes ⟨location⟩ but take care when using \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount with commands like \thepage as they can end up becoming detokenized too early. -

    Note that the record count includes locations that

    Note that the record count includes locations that bib2glssection counter (stored in the recordcount.section field) is 1. -

    With the unit counting on as well, the field

    With the unit counting on as well, the field recordcount.page.1 is set to 2, recordcount.page.2 is set to 1, recordcount.page.3 is set to 4 and recordcount.section.3 is set to 1. -

    You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to +

    You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to the field value if set or to 0 if unset: -



    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount  \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{label}

    -

    +

    This expands to the total record count for the entry given by ⟨label⟩.

    -
    +
    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{bird}
    -

    expands to 8. -


    expands to 8. +


    \GlsXtrRecordCount  label}{counter}

    -

    +

    This expands to the counter total for the entry given by ⟨label⟩ where ⟨counter⟩ is the @@ -14584,19 +14896,19 @@ counter name. For example:

    -
    +
    \GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{page}
    -

    expands to 7 and +

    expands to 7 and

    -
    +
    \GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{section}
    -

    expands to 1. -


    expands to 1. +


    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨location}

    -

    +

    This expands to the total for the given location. For example

    -
    +
    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount{bird}{page}{3}
    -

    expands to 4. Be careful about using

    expands to 4. Be careful about using \thepage in the ⟨location⟩ part. Remember that due to TEX’s asynchronous output routine, \thepage may not be correct. -

    There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like

    There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like \cgls and \cglsformat that are triggered by the record count. These are listed below. -



    \rgls  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rglspl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGls  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlspl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLS  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSpl  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    These commands check the recordcount -

    +
    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{recordcount}{1}
    -

    For convenience, you can use -


    For convenience, you can use +



    -

    +

    to set the recordcountn⟩ for all the categories listed in ⟨category list⟩. -

    The

    The \rgls-like commands use -



    \glsxtrifrecordtrigger  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨normal}

    -

    +

    to determine whether the \rgls-like command should behave like its \gls counterpart (⟨normal⟩) or whether it should instead use ⟨trigger code⟩. -

    This command checks if the

    This command checks if the recordcount attribute is set. If not is just does ⟨normal⟩, otherwise it tests if -



    \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue  \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue{label}

    -

    +

    is greater than the value given in the recordcount -

    +
    \newcommand*{\glsxtrrecordtriggervalue}[1]{%  
     \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{#1}%  
    }
    -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨trigger code⟩ part writes a record with the format set to trigger format⟩. Then it unsets the first use flag. Note that it doesn’t implement the post-link hook. This ensures that the record count is correct on the next run. -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨trigger format⟩ depends on the \rgls-like command used and will be one of the following: -



    \rglsformat  label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rglsplformat  label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlsformat  label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlsplformat  label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSformat  label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSplformat  label}{insert}

    -

    +

    These all behave much like their \cglsformat counterparts. If the entry’s regular attribute is set or if the entry doesn’t have a long form, the first or first plural is used, otherwise the long or long plural form is used. -

    You can use -


    You can use +


    \glsxtrenablerecordcount  \glsxtrenablerecordcount

    -

    +

    to redefine \gls, \glspl, \rGls, class="cmtt-10">\rGlspl, \rGLS, \rGLSpl, respectively, for convenience. -

    If you don’t want the entries that use ⟨

    If you don’t want the entries that use ⟨trigger code⟩ to appear in the glossary, you need to use the resource option trigger-type to assign them to another glossary. @@ -14916,7 +15228,7 @@ For example:

    -
    +
    \documentclass{article}  
    \usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}  
    \newignoredglossary{ignored} @@ -14933,7 +15245,7 @@ For example:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}
    -

    In the above,

    In the above, stc and upa both only have one record, so they are assigned to the main one.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    10. Miscellaneous New Commands

    -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \glsrefentry entry to cross-reference entries @@ -14960,21 +15272,21 @@ class="cmss-10">subentrycounter options. The glossaries-extra package provides a supplementary command -



    \glsxtrpageref  \glsxtrpageref{label}

    -

    +

    that works in the same way except that it uses \pageref instead of \ref. -

    You can copy an entry to another glossary using -


    You can copy an entry to another glossary using +


    \glsxtrcopytoglossary  }{glossary-type}

    -

    +

    This appends ⟨entry-label⟩ to the end of the internal list for the glossary given by ⟨ -

    +
    \printunsrtglossary[target=false]
    -

    -

    The

    +

    The glossaries package allows you to set preamble code for a given glossary type using \setglossarypreamble. This overrides any previous setting. With glossaries-extra (as from v1.12) you can instead append to the preamble using -



    \apptoglossarypreamble  type]{code}

    -

    +

    or prepend using -



    \pretoglossarypreamble  type]{code}

    -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.1 Entry Fields

    -

    A field may now be used to store the name of a text-block command that takes a +

    A field may now be used to store the name of a text-block command that takes a single argument. The field is given by -



    \GlsXtrFmtField  \GlsXtrFmtField

    -

    +

    The default value is useri. Note that the value must be the control sequence name without the initial backslash. -

    For example: +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \newcommand*{\mtx}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}  
    \newcommand*{\mtxinv}[1]{\mtx{#1}\sp{-1}}  
    \newglossaryentry{matrix}{% @@ -15079,10 +15391,10 @@ class="cmti-10">without the initial backslash.  
       $\mtx{M}\mtxinv{M}=\glssymbol{identitymatrix}$}  
    }
    -

    -

    There are two commands provided that allow you to apply the command to an +

    +

    There are two commands provided that allow you to apply the command to an argument: -



    \glsxtrfmt  label}{text}

    -

    +

    This effectively does

    cs⟩ is the command obtained from the control seque provided field, which must be defined to take a single required argument. Although it effectively acts like \glslink it misses out the post-link hook. -

    The default ⟨

    The default ⟨default-options⟩ are given by -



    \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions  \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions

    -

    +

    This is defined as noindex but may be redefined as appropriate. Note that the replacement text of \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions is prepended to the optional argument of \glslink. -

    As from version 1.23, there’s also a starred version of this command that has a +

    As from version 1.23, there’s also a starred version of this command that has a final optional argument: -



    \glsxtrfmt*  text}[insert]

    -

    +

    Both the starred and unstarred versions use: -



    \glsxtrfmtdisplay  }{insert}

    -

    +

    within the link text. In the case of the unstarred version ⟨insert⟩ will be empty. It will also be empty if the final option argument is missing from the starred form. If the @@ -15185,25 +15497,25 @@ default definition is:

    -
    +
    \newcommand{\glsxtrfmtdisplay}[3]{\csuse{#1}{#2}#3}
    -

    which puts ⟨

    which puts ⟨text⟩ inside the argument of the control sequence and ⟨insert⟩ outside it (but it will still be inside the link text). -

    Remember that nested links cause a problem so avoid using commands like

    Remember that nested links cause a problem so avoid using commands like \gls or \glsxtrfmt within ⟨text⟩.
    -

    -

    For example: +

    +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \[  
      \glsxtrfmt{matrix}{A}  
      \glsxtrfmt{matrixinv}{A} @@ -15211,7 +15523,7 @@ class="cmti-10">text⟩.
     
      \glssymbol{identitymatrix}  
    \]
    -

    If the default options are set to

    If the default options are set to noindex then \glsxtrfmt won’t index, but will create a hyperlink (if -

    +
    \renewcommand{\GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions}{hyper=false,noindex}
    -

    -

    Note that

    +

    Note that \glsxtrfmt won’t work with PDF bookmarks. Instead you can use -



    \glsxtrentryfmt  label}{text}

    -

    +

    This uses \texorpdfstring and will simply expand to ⟨text⟩ within the PDF @@ -15249,14 +15561,14 @@ class="cmti-10">text⟩} if a control sequence name has been provided or just ⟨text⟩ otherwise. -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \glsaddstoragekey to add new keys. This command will cause an error if the key has already been defined. The glossaries-extra package provides a supplementary command that will only define the key if it doesn’t already exist: -



    \glsxtrprovidestoragekey  }{cs}

    -

    +

    If the key has already been defined, it will still provide the command given in the third argument ⟨cs⟩ (if it hasn’t already been defined). Unlike cs⟩ may be left empty if you’re happy to just use \glsfieldfetch to fetch the value of this new key. -

    You can test if a key has been provided with: -


    You can test if a key has been provided with: +


    \glsxtrifkeydefined  true}{false}

    -

    +

    This tests if ⟨key⟩ is available for use in the ⟨key⟩= list in the second argument of @@ -15298,7 +15610,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry (or the optional argument of commands l class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation). The corresponding field may not have been set for any of the entries if no default was provided. -

    There are now commands provided to set individual fields. Note that +

    There are now commands provided to set individual fields. Note that these only change the specified field, not any related values. For example, changing the value of the textparent field). Unexpected results may occur if they are subsequently changed. -



    \GlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field⟩ to ⟨value⟩ for the entry given by ⟨

    \GlsXtrSetField uses -



    \glsxtrsetfieldifexists  }{code}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry label and ⟨code⟩ is the assignment code. -

    This command just uses

    This command just uses \glsdoifexists{=warn\glsxtrsetfieldifexists to simply do ⟨code⟩ if you want to skip the existence check. Alternatively you can instead use -



    \glsxtrdeffield  replacement text}

    -

    +

    This simply uses etoolbox’s \csdef without any checks. This command isn’t robust. There is also a version that uses \csedef instead: -



    \glsxtredeffield  replacement text}

    -

    -


    +


    \gGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrSetField but globally. -



    \eGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrSetField but uses protected expansion. -



    \xGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \gGlsXtrSetField but uses protected expansion. -



    \GlsXtrLetField  field}{cs}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field⟩ to the replacement text of ⟨cs⟩ for the entry given by ⟨label⟩ (using \let). -



    \csGlsXtrLetField  }{cs name}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrLetField but the control sequence name is supplied instead. -



    \GlsXtrLetFieldToField  label-2}{field-2}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field-1⟩ for the entry given by ⟨label-1⟩ to the field given by @@ -15520,7 +15832,7 @@ class="cmti-10">code⟩} is still used, as for \GlsXtrSetField. -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \ifglshasfield to determine if a field has been @@ -15529,7 +15841,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra package provides a simpler version: -



    \glsxtrifhasfield  }{false}

    -

    +

    (New to v1.19.) Unlike \ifglshasfield, this version doesn’t complain if the entry (given by ⟨true⟩ part is done otherwise it does ⟨false⟩. Within ⟨true⟩ you may use -



    \glscurrentfieldvalue  \glscurrentfieldvalue

    -

    +

    to access the field value. This command includes grouping which scopes the ⟨true⟩ and ⟨false⟩ parts. The starred version -



    \glsxtrifhasfield*  }{false}

    -

    +

    omits the implicit grouping. -

    There is also a version that simply uses

    There is also a version that simply uses \ifcsundef. It doesn’t save the field value, but can be used if you only need to check if the field is defined without accessing it: -



    \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef  }{false}

    -

    -

    There’s a difference between an undefined field and an unset field. An undefined +

    +

    There’s a difference between an undefined field and an unset field. An undefined field hasn’t been assigned any value (no associated internal control sequence has been defined). If a defined field has been defined to empty, then it’s considered unset. \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef for fields that can only be defined through commands like \GlsXtrSetField.
    -

    -

    You can test if a field value equals a string using -


    +

    You can test if a field value equals a string using +


    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    If the entry exists and has the given field set to the given text then this does ⟨true⟩ otherwise it does ⟨text⟩ using etoolbox’s \ifdefstring. -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \glsfieldfetch which can be used to fetch the value of the given field and store it in a control sequence. The glossaries-extra package provides another way of accessing the field value: -



    \glsxtrusefield  }

    -

    +

    This works in the same way as commands like \glsentrytext but the field label is specified in the first argument. Note that the ⟨glossaries manual. No error occurs if the entry or field haven’t been defined. This command is not robust. -

    There is also a version that converts the first letter to uppercase (analogous to +

    There is also a version that converts the first letter to uppercase (analogous to \Glsentrytext): -



    \Glsxtrusefield  entry-label}{field-label}

    -

    -

    If you want to use a field to store a list that can be used as an

    +

    If you want to use a field to store a list that can be used as an etoolbox internal list, you can use the following command that adds an item to the field using @@ -15699,7 +16011,7 @@ list, you can use the following command that adds an item to the field using class="cmss-10">etoolbox’s \listcsadd: -



    \glsxtrfieldlistadd  }{item}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label, ⟨field⟩ is the entry’s field and ⟨\listgadd, \listeadd and \listxadd: -



    \glsxtrfieldlistgadd  }{item}

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrfieldlisteadd  }{item}

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrfieldlistxadd  }{item}

    -

    +

    You can then iterate over the list using: -



    \glsxtrfielddolistloop  }{field}

    -

    +

    or -



    \glsxtrfieldforlistloop  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨handler}

    -

    +

    that internally use \dolistcsloop and \forlistloop, respectively. -

    There are also commands that use

    There are also commands that use \ifinlistcs: -



    \glsxtrfieldifinlist  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    and \xifinlistcs -



    \glsxtrfieldxifinlist  true}{false}

    -

    -

    See the

    +

    See the etoolbox’s user manual for further details of these commands, in particular the limitations of \ifinlist. -

    If the field has a comma-separated list value instead, you can iterate over it +

    If the field has a comma-separated list value instead, you can iterate over it using: -



    \glsxtrforcsvfield  }{handler}

    -

    +

    where again ⟨handler⟩ is a control sequence that takes a single argument. Unlike the \@endfortrue. The \glsxtrforcsvfield command locally defines a user level command: -



    \glsxtrendfor  \glsxtrendfor

    -

    +

    which is just a synonym for \@endfortrue. -

    The loop is performed within the true part of

    The loop is performed within the true part of \glsxtrifhasfield so scoping is automatically applied. -

    When using the

    When using the record option, in addition to recording the usual location, you can also record the current value of another counter at the same time using the preamble-only command: -



    \GlsXtrRecordCounter  \GlsXtrRecordCounter{counter name}

    -

    +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}  
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter{section}
    -

    Each time an entry is referenced with commands like

    Each time an entry is referenced with commands like \gls or \glstext, the \gls{bird} is used in section 1.2 th -

    +
    \glsxtrfieldlistgadd{bird}{record.section}{1.2}
    -

    Note that there’s no key corresponding to this new

    Note that there’s no key corresponding to this new record.section field, but its value can be accessed with \glsxtrfielduse or the list can be iterated over with \glsxtrfielddolistloop etc. -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.2 Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing

    -



    \printunsrtglossary  \printunsrtglossary[options]

    -

    +

    This behaves like \printnoidxglossary but never sorts the entries and always lists all the defined entries for the given glossary (and doesn’t require @@ -15988,8 +16300,8 @@ the definition of \glsgroupskip to avoid the “Incomplete \iftrue” error that may otherwise occur. -

    There’s also a starred form -


    There’s also a starred form +


    \printunsrtglossary*  options]{code}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to

    \endgroup class="cmtt-10">\glossarypreamble, the supplied ⟨code⟩ is done before the glossary header. -

    This means you now have the option to simply list all entries on the first +

    This means you now have the option to simply list all entries on the first LATEX run without the need for a post-processor, however there will be no §9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). -

    No attempt is made to gather hierarchical elements. If child entries aren’t defined +

    No attempt is made to gather hierarchical elements. If child entries aren’t defined immediately after their parent entry, they won’t be together in the glossary when using \printunsrtglossary.
    -

    +

    -

    If you have any entries with the

    If you have any entries with the see key set, you will need the glossariesrecord=only package option will automatically deal with this. -

    For example: +

    For example:

    -
    +
    \documentclass{article}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
    \newglossaryentry{zebra}{name={zebra},description={stripy animal}} @@ -16074,32 +16386,32 @@ will automatically deal with this.  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}
    -

    In the above, zebra will be listed before ant as it was defined first. -

    If you allow document definitions with the

    In the above, zebra will be listed before ant as it was defined first. +

    If you allow document definitions with the docdefs option, the document will require a second LATEX run if the entries are defined after \printunsrtglossary. -

    The optional argument is as for

    The optional argument is as for \printnoidxglossary (except for the sort key, which isn’t available). -

    All glossaries may be displayed in the order of their definition using: -


    All glossaries may be displayed in the order of their definition using: +


    \printunsrtglossaries  \printunsrtglossaries

    -

    +

    which is analogous to \printnoidxglossaries. This just iterates over all defined glossaries (that aren’t on the ignored list) and does \printunsrtglossary[type=⟨type⟩]. -

    To avoid complications caused by

    To avoid complications caused by tabular-like glossary styles,



    \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook  \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook class="cmtt-10">{⟨label}

    -

    +

    This hook should not display any content, but may be used to perform calculations. For example, to calculate widths. Within this hook you can use: -



    \printunsrtglossaryskipentry  \printunsrtglossaryskipentry

    -

    +

    to skip the current entry. This will prevent the entry from being added to the internal command. -

    There’s another hook immediately before the internal command containing the +

    There’s another hook immediately before the internal command containing the glossary code is performed: -



    \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary  \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary

    -

    +

    -

    The internal command uses -


    The internal command uses +


    \printunsrtglossaryhandler  \printunsrtglossaryhandler{label}

    -

    +

    to display each item in the list, where ⟨label⟩ is the current label. -

    By default the handler just does -


    By default the handler just does +


    \glsxtrunsrtdo  \glsxtrunsrtdo{label}

    -

    +

    which determines whether to use \glossentry or \subglossentry and checks the @@ -16171,10 +16483,10 @@ class="cmss-10">loclist fields for the number list. -

    You can redefine the handler if required. For example, you may want to filter +

    You can redefine the handler if required. For example, you may want to filter entries according to the category label. You can test if a label is contained in a comma-separated list of labels using: -



    \glsxtriflabelinlist  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    The ⟨label⟩ and ⟨label list⟩ will be fully expanded. -

    If you redefine the handler to exclude entries, you may end up with an empty +

    If you redefine the handler to exclude entries, you may end up with an empty glossary. This could cause a problem for the list-based styles.
    -

    -

    For example, if the preamble includes: +

    +

    For example, if the preamble includes:

    -
    +
    \usepackage[record,style=index]{glossaries-extra}  
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter{section}
    -

    then you can print the glossary but first redefine the handler to only select entries +

    then you can print the glossary but first redefine the handler to only select entries that include the current section number in the record.section field:

    -
    +
    \renewcommand{\printunsrtglossaryhandler}[1]{%  
      \glsxtrfieldxifinlist{#1}{record.section}{\thesection}  
      {\glsxtrunsrtdo{#1}}%  
      {}%  
    }
    -

    -

    Alternatively you can use the starred form of

    +

    Alternatively you can use the starred form of \printunsrtglossary which will localise the change:

    -
    +
    \printunsrtglossary*{%  
      \renewcommand{\printunsrtglossaryhandler}[1]{%  
        \glsxtrfieldxifinlist{#1}{record.section}{\thesection} @@ -16236,8 +16548,8 @@ localise the change:  
      }%  
    }
    -

    -

    If you are using the

    +

    If you are using the hyperref package and want to display the same glossary more than once, you can also add a temporary redefinition of -

    +
    \printunsrtglossary*{%  
      \renewcommand{\printunsrtglossaryhandler}[1]{%  
        \glsxtrfieldxifinlist{#1}{record.section}{\thesection} @@ -16263,7 +16575,7 @@ duplicate hypertarget names. For example:  
      }%  
    }
    -

    Note that this will cause a problem if your descriptions contain commands like

    Note that this will cause a problem if your descriptions contain commands like \gls that need to link an entry that doesn’t appear in the summary. In this case, it’s a better approach to use: @@ -16271,7 +16583,7 @@ better approach to use:

    -
    +
    \printunsrtglossary*{%  
      \renewcommand{\printunsrtglossaryhandler}[1]{%  
        \glsxtrfieldxifinlist{#1}{record.section}{\thesection} @@ -16287,14 +16599,14 @@ better approach to use:  
      }%  
    }
    -

    -

    If it’s a short summary at the start of a section, you might also want to suppress +

    +

    If it’s a short summary at the start of a section, you might also want to suppress the glossary header and add some vertical space afterwards:

    -
    +
    \printunsrtglossary*{%  
      \renewcommand{\printunsrtglossaryhandler}[1]{%  
        \glsxtrfieldxifinlist{#1}{record.section}{\thesection} @@ -16312,9 +16624,9 @@ the glossary header and add some vertical space afterwards:  
      \appto\glossarypostamble{\glspar\medskip\glspar}%  
    }
    -

    -

    There’s a shortcut command that essentially does this: -


    +

    There’s a shortcut command that essentially does this: +


    \printunsrtglossaryunit  counter name}

    -

    +

    The above example can simply be replaced with:

    -
    +
    \printunsrtglossaryunit{section}
    -

    -

    This shortcut command is actually defined to use

    +

    This shortcut command is actually defined to use \printunsrtglossary* with -



    \printunsrtglossaryunitsetup  counter name}

    -

    +

    so if you want to just make some minor modifications you can do

    -
    +
    \printunsrtglossary*{\printunsrtglossaryunitsetup{section}%  
      \renewcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][]{\subsection*{Summary}}%  
    }
    -

    which will start the list with a subsection header with the title “Summary” +

    which will start the list with a subsection header with the title “Summary” (overriding the glossary’s title). -

    Note that this shortcut command is only available with the

    Note that this shortcut command is only available with the record (or @@ -16369,7 +16681,7 @@ href="#styopt.record">record=alsoindex) package option. -

    This temporary change in the hypertarget prefix means you need to explicitly use +

    This temporary change in the hypertarget prefix means you need to explicitly use \hyperlink to create a link to it as commands like \gls will try to link to the target @@ -16381,12 +16693,12 @@ the front or back matter) which can be the target for all glossary references an just use \printunsrtglossaryunit for a quick summary at the start of a section etc. -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.3 Standalone Entry Items

    -

    It may be that you don’t want a list but would rather display entry details +

    It may be that you don’t want a list but would rather display entry details throughout the document. You can simply do \glsentryname followed by -

    +
    \newcommand{\displayterm}[1]{%  
     \par\medskip\par\noindent  
     Definition: \glsentryname{#1}.\par @@ -16411,43 +16723,43 @@ custom command:  
     \par\medskip  
    }
    -

    define your entries +

    define your entries

    -
    +
    \newglossaryentry{function}{name={function},  
      description={a relation or expression involving variables}  
    }
    -

    and then later in the text: +

    and then later in the text:

    -
    +
    \displayterm{function}
    -

    -

    However, if may be that you want to use

    +

    However, if may be that you want to use hyperref and have commands like \gls link back to the place where the term is described. Instead of using \glsentryname use -



    \glsxtrglossentry  \glsxtrglossentry{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. -

    This is designed to behave much like the way the name is displayed in the +

    This is designed to behave much like the way the name is displayed in the glossary. It performs the following:

    -

    otherwise it does

    +

    otherwise it does

    • \glsentryitem{glossnamefont

      If you have used

      If you have used \nopostdesc or \glsxtrnopostpunc in any of your description fields, you can use -



      \glsxtractivatenopost  \glsxtractivatenopost

      -

      +

      to make these commands behave as they normally do within a glossary. This needs to be placed before

      @@ -16529,10 +16841,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">}\glspostdescription class="cmtt-10">\glsnonextpages and \glsnextpages have no effect outside of the glossary and are not intended for use in a standalone context. -

      It’s also possible to select a different field (rather than using

      It’s also possible to select a different field (rather than using name): -



      \glsxtrglossentryother  }{field}

      -

      +

      The ⟨field⟩ must be given using its internal field label which may not be the same as the key used to set the field. See the key to field mappings table in the }.

    • Otherwise ⟨header⟩ is simply the field value.
    -

    The

    The \glsxtrglossentryother command internally uses \glossentrynameother{label}

    (for example, \glssymbolaccessdisplay). -

    This means that my custom command can be changed to: +

    This means that my custom command can be changed to:

    -
    +
    \newcommand{\displayterm}[1]{%  
     \par\medskip\par\noindent  
     Definition: \glsxtrglossentry{#1}.\par @@ -16612,7 +16924,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glssymbolaccessdisplay).  
     \par\medskip  
    }
    -

    If I want numbered definitions, then I can use the package options

    If I want numbered definitions, then I can use the package options entrycounter or subentrycounter -

    + -

    The counter label uses a dot after the number by default but this can be changed to +

    The counter label uses a dot after the number by default but this can be changed to a colon:

    -
    +
    \renewcommand*{\glsentrycounterlabel}{\theglossaryentry:\space}
    -

    It’s now possible to not only use

    It’s now possible to not only use \gls to link back to the definition but also use \glsrefentry to reference the counter and \glsxtrpageref to reference the page number. -

    If I want the description to behave more like it does in a glossary in need to make +

    If I want the description to behave more like it does in a glossary in need to make the following modification:

    -
    +
    \newcommand{\displayterm}[1]{%  
     \par\medskip\par\noindent  
     Definition \glsxtrglossentry{#1}.\par @@ -16662,18 +16974,18 @@ the following modification:  
     \par\medskip  
    }
    -

    (Note the grouping to localise

    (Note the grouping to localise \glsxtractivatenopost.) -

    You can also use

    You can also use \glsxtrglossentry within section headings. For example:

    -
    +
    \section{\glsxtrglossentry{function}}
    -

    This will use

    This will use \glsentryname in PDF bookmarks (if \texorpdfstring is defined) and will use \@glsxtrnotinmark and \glsxtrrestoremarkhook.) -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.4 Entry Aliases

    -

    An entry can be made an alias of another entry using the

    An entry can be made an alias of another entry using the alias key. The value should be the label of the other term. There’s no check for the other’s @@ -16705,7 +17017,7 @@ defining the other entry after the aliased entry. (For example, when used with href="#glo:bib2gls">bib2gls.) -

    If an entry ⟨

    If an entry ⟨entry-1⟩ is made an alias of ⟨entry-2⟩ then:

    -

    The index suppression trigger is performed by -


    The index suppression trigger is performed by +


    \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex  \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex

    -

    +

    This is performed after the default options provided by \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts @@ -16795,49 +17107,49 @@ class="cmss-10">=only, \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex will default to do nothing. -

    Within the definition of

    Within the definition of \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex you can use -



    \glsxtrindexaliased  \glsxtrindexaliased

    -

    +

    to index ⟨entry-2⟩. -

    The index suppression command can be redefined to index the main term instead. +

    The index suppression command can be redefined to index the main term instead. For example:

    -
    +
    \renewcommand{\glsxtrsetaliasnoindex}{%  
     \glsxtrindexaliased  
     \setkeys{glslink}{noindex}%  
    }
    -

    -

    The value of the

    +

    The value of the alias field can be accessed using -



    \glsxtralias  \glsxtralias{label}

    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    11. Supplemental Packages

    -

    The

    The glossaries bundle provides additional support packages glossaries-prefix (for @@ -16846,10 +17158,10 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp (for accessibility support). These packages aren’t automatically loaded.

    -

    Top

    11.1 Prefixes or Determiners

    -

    If prefixing is required, you can simply load

    If prefixing is required, you can simply load glossaries-prefix after glossaries-extra. For @@ -16858,7 +17170,7 @@ example:

    -
    +
    \documentclass{article}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-prefix} @@ -16873,13 +17185,13 @@ example:  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    11.2 Accessibility Support

    -

    The

    The glossaries-accsupp package needs to be loaded before glossaries-extra or through @@ -16891,10 +17203,10 @@ class="cmss-10">accsupp -

    +
    \usepackage[accsupp]{glossaries-extra}
    -

    If you don’t load

    If you don’t load glossaries-accsupp or you load glossaries-accsuppxxx⟩ commands described below will simply be equiv corresponding \glsentryxxx⟩ commands. -

    The following

    The following \glsaccessxxx⟩ commands add accessibility information wrapped around the corresponding \glsentryxxx⟩ commands. There is no check for existence of the entry nor do any of these commands add formatting, hyperlinks or indexing information. -



    \glsaccessname  \glsaccessname{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the name field for the entry identified by ⟨label⟩. -

    If the

    If the glossaries-accsupp package isn’t loaded, this is simply defined as:

    -
    +
    \newcommand*{\glsaccessname}[1]{\glsentryname{#1}}
    -

    otherwise it’s defined as: +

    otherwise it’s defined as:

    -
    +
    \newcommand*{\glsaccessname}[1]{%  
      \glsnameaccessdisplay  
      {% @@ -16950,20 +17262,20 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp  {#1}%  
    }
    -

    (

    (\glsnameaccessdisplay is defined by the glossaries-accsupp package.) The first letter upper case version is: -



    \Glsaccessname  \Glsaccessname{label}

    -

    +

    Without the glossaries-accsupp package this is just defined as: @@ -16971,17 +17283,17 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp -

    +
    \newcommand*{\Glsaccessname}[1]{\Glsentryname{#1}}
    -

    With the

    With the glossaries-accsupp package this is defined as:

    -
    +
    \newcommand*{\Glsaccessname}[1]{%  
      \glsnameaccessdisplay  
      {% @@ -16990,112 +17302,112 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp  {#1}%  
    }
    -

    -

    The following commands are all defined in an analogous manner. -


    +

    The following commands are all defined in an analogous manner. +


    \glsaccesstext  \glsaccesstext{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the text field. -



    \Glsaccesstext  \Glsaccesstext{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the text field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessplural  \glsaccessplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the plural field. -



    \Glsaccessplural  \Glsaccessplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the plural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessfirst  \glsaccessfirst{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the first field. -



    \Glsaccessfirst  \Glsaccessfirst{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the first field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessfirstplural  \glsaccessfirstplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the firstplural field. -



    \Glsaccessfirstplural  \Glsaccessfirstplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the firstplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesssymbol  \glsaccesssymbol{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbol field. -



    \Glsaccesssymbol  }

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbol field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesssymbolplural  \glsaccesssymbolplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbolplural field. -



    \Glsaccesssymbolplural  \Glsaccesssymbolplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbolplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessdesc  \glsaccessdesc{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the desc field. -



    \Glsaccessdesc  \Glsaccessdesc{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the desc field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessdescplural  \glsaccessdescplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descplural field. -



    \Glsaccessdescplural  \Glsaccessdescplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessshort  \glsaccessshort{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the short field. -



    \Glsaccessshort  \Glsaccessshort{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the short field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessshortpl  \glsaccessshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the shortplural field. -



    \Glsaccessshortpl  \Glsaccessshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the shortplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesslong  \glsaccesslong{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the long field. -



    \Glsaccesslong  \Glsaccesslong{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the long field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesslongpl  }

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the longplural field. -



    \Glsaccesslongpl  \Glsaccesslongpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the longplural field with the first letter converted to upper @@ -17278,11 +17590,11 @@ case.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    12. Sample Files

    -

    The following sample files are provided with this package: +

    The following sample files are provided with this package:

    sample.tex
    sample-suppl-hyp.tex. -

    -

    +

    Top

    13. Multi-Lingual Support

    -

    There’s only one command provided by

    There’s only one command provided by glossaries-extra that you’re likely to want to change in your document and that’s \abbreviationsname\acronymname (provided by glossaries). -

    You can redefine it in the usual way. For example: +

    You can redefine it in the usual way. For example:

    -
    +
    \renewcommand*{\abbreviationsname}{List of Abbreviations}
    -

    Or using

    Or using babel or polyglossiapolyglossia -

    +
    \appto\captionsenglish{%  
     \renewcommand*{\abbreviationsname}{List of Abbreviations}%  
    }
    -

    -

    Alternatively you can use the

    +

    Alternatively you can use the title key when you print the list of abbreviations. For example: @@ -17607,24 +17919,24 @@ For example:

    -
    +
    \printabbreviations[title={List of Abbreviations}]
    -

    or +

    or

    -
    +
    \printglossary[type=abbreviations,title={List of Abbreviations}]
    -

    -

    The other fixed text commands are the diagnostic messages, which shouldn’t +

    +

    The other fixed text commands are the diagnostic messages, which shouldn’t appear in the final draft of your document. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package has the facility to load language modules if they exist, but won’t warn if they don’t. -

    If you want to write your own language module, you just need to create a file +

    If you want to write your own language module, you just need to create a file called glossariesxtr-langtracklang package). For example, glossariesxtr-french.ldf. -

    The simplest code for this file is: +

    The simplest code for this file is:

    -
    +
    \ProvidesGlossariesExtraLang{french}[2015/12/09 v1.0]  
    \newcommand*{\glossariesxtrcaptionsfrench}{%  
     \def\abbreviationsname{Abr\'eviations}% @@ -17665,8 +17977,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">glossariesxtr-french.ldf.  
      \glossariesxtrcaptionsfrench  
    }
    -

    -

    You can adapt this for other languages by replacing all instances of the language +

    +

    You can adapt this for other languages by replacing all instances of the language identifier french and the translated text Abr\’eviations as appropriate. This EX’s path so that it can be found by class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra. You might also want to consider uploading it to CTAN so that it can be useful to others. (Please don’t send it to me. I already have more packages than I am able to maintain.) -

    If you additionally want to provide translations for the diagnostic messages used +

    If you additionally want to provide translations for the diagnostic messages used when a glossary is missing, you need to redefine the following commands: -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningHead  }{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This document is incomplete. The external file associated with the +

    This document is incomplete. The external file associated with the glossary ‘⟨label⟩’ (which should be called ⟨file⟩) hasn’t been created.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This has probably happened because there are no entries defined in +

    This has probably happened because there are no entries defined in this glossary.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    If you don’t want this glossary, add

    If you don’t want this glossary, add nomain to your package option list when you load glossaries-extra.sty. For example:

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain{label}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    Did you forget to use

    Did you forget to use type=label⟩ when you defined your entries? If you tried to load entries into this glossary with ] as the optional argument? If you did, check that the definitions in the file you loaded all had the type set to \glsdefaulttype.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    Check the contents of the file ⟨

    Check the contents of the file ⟨file⟩. If it’s empty, that means you haven’t indexed any of your entries in this glossary (using commands like \gls or \glsadd) so this list can’t be generated. If the file isn’t empty, the document build process hasn’t been completed.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    You need +

    You need to either replace \makenoidxglossaries with \makeglossaries or @@ -17784,17 +18096,17 @@ class="cmtt-10">\printglossaries) class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary (or \printnoidxglossaries) and then rebuild this document.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    The file ⟨

    The file ⟨file⟩ doesn’t exist. This most likely means you haven’t used \makeglossaries or you have used \nofiles. If this is just a draft version of the document, you can suppress this message using the nomissingglstext package option.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This message will be removed once the problem has been fixed.

    -


    This message will be removed once the problem has been fixed.

    +


    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo

    -

    +

    This is advice on how to generate the glossary files. See the documented code (glossaries-extra-code.pdf) for further details. -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake{label}

    -

    +

    This is the message produced when the automakeA

    abbreviation styles (deprecated):
        footnote-em  
    1
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24170" >1
        footnote-sc  2
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24162" >2
        footnote-sm  3
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24166" >3
        long-desc-em  4
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23078" >4
        long-desc-sc  5
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23070" >5
        long-desc-sm  6
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23074" >6
        long-em  7
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23104" >7
        long-sc  8
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23096" >8
        long-sm  9
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23100" >9
        postfootnote-em  10
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24193" >10
        postfootnote-sc  11
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24185" >11
        postfootnote-sm  12
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24189" >12
    abbreviation styles:
        footnote  13
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24157" >13
        long  14
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23090" >14
        long-desc  15
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23064" >15
        long-em-noshort-em  16, 17, 18
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23105" >17, 18
        long-em-noshort-em-desc  19, 20
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23079" >19, 20
        long-em-noshort-em-desc-noreg  21
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24072" >21
        long-em-noshort-em-noreg  22, 23, 24
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23110" >23, 24
        long-em-short-em  25, 27, 28
        long-em-short-em-desc  29
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24069" >29
        long-hyphen-long-hyphen  30
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24228" >30
        long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg  31, 32
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24217" >31, 32
        long-hyphen-noshort-noreg  33, 34
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24220" >34
        long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen  35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24216" >36, 37, 38, 39, 40
        long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen-desc  41
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24230" >41
        long-hyphen-short-hyphen  42, 43, 44, 45, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46
        long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc  47, 48
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24218" >47, 48
        long-noshort  49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23084" >51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57
        long-noshort-desc  58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23057" >60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67
        long-noshort-desc-noreg  68
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24049" >68
        long-noshort-em  69
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23101" >69
        long-noshort-em-desc  70
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23075" >70
        long-noshort-noreg  71
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24046" >71
        long-noshort-sc  72, 73
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23092" >73
        long-noshort-sc-desc  74, 74, 75
        long-noshort-sm  76
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23097" >76
        long-noshort-sm-desc  77
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23071" >77
        long-only-short-only  78, 79, 80
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24025" >80
        long-only-short-only-desc  81
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24024" >81
        long-postshort-user  82, 83
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24201" >82, 83
        long-postshort-user-desc  84
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24204" >84
        long-short  85, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
    @@ -18216,1781 +18528,1787 @@ href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-25091" >100
    class="cmss-10">long-short-desc  101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24052" >103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109
        long-short-em  111, 112, 113, 114
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22051" >110, 111, 112, 113
        long-short-em-desc  115, 116
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24066" >114, 115
        long-short-sc  117, 118, 119, 120
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12004" >116, 117, 118, 119
        long-short-sc-desc  121, 122
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12018" >120, 121
        long-short-sm  123, 124, 125
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12006" >122, 123, 124
        long-short-sm-desc  126, 127
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12020" >125, 126
        long-short-user  128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22084" >127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135
        long-short-user-desc  137
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24075" >136
        nolong-short  138, 139
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23010" >137, 138
        nolong-short-em  140
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23031" >139
        nolong-short-noreg  141
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24087" >140
        nolong-short-sc  142
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23017" >141
        nolong-short-sm  143
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23024" >142
        postfootnote  144
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24180" >143
        short  145
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23008" >144
        short-desc  146
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23040" >145
        short-em  147
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23029" >146
        short-em-desc  148
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23055" >147
        short-em-footnote  149, 150
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22102" >148, 149
        short-em-footnote-desc  151
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22101" >150
        short-em-long  152, 153, 154
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22052" >151, 152, 153
        short-em-long-desc  155, 156
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24130" >154, 155
        short-em-long-em  157, 158
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22057" >156, 157
        short-em-long-em-desc  159
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24133" >158
        short-em-nolong  160, 161, 162
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23026" >159, 160, 161
        short-em-nolong-desc  163, 164
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23052" >162, 163
        short-em-postfootnote  165
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24190" >164
        short-footnote  166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12034" >165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174
        short-footnote-desc  176
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12040" >175
        short-hyphen-long-hyphen  177, 178
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24233" >176, 177
        short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc  179
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24237" >178
        short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen  180, 181
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24240" >179, 180
        short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen-desc  182
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24245" >181
        short-long  183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12010" >182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192
        short-long-desc  194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12024" >193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199
        short-long-user  202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24038" >200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206
        short-long-user-desc  209
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24136" >207
        short-nolong  210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-18012" >208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221
        short-nolong-desc  224, 225, 226, 227, 228
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23033" >222, 223, 224, 225, 226
        short-nolong-desc-noreg  229
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24115" >227
        short-nolong-noreg  230
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24084" >228
        short-postfootnote  231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8058" >229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235
        short-postlong-user  238, 239, 240
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24194" >236, 237, 238
        short-postlong-user-desc  241
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24197" >239
        short-sc  242
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23015" >240
        short-sc-desc  243
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23045" >241
        short-sc-footnote  244, 245, 246
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12036" >242, 243, 244
        short-sc-footnote-desc  247
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12042" >245
        short-sc-long  248, 249, 250, 251
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12012" >246, 247, 248, 249
        short-sc-long-desc  252, 253
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12026" >250, 251
        short-sc-nolong  254, 255, 256
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23012" >252, 253, 254
        short-sc-nolong-desc  257, 258
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23042" >255, 256
        short-sc-postfootnote  259, 260
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22095" >257, 258
        short-sm  261
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23022" >259
        short-sm-desc  262
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23050" >260
        short-sm-footnote  263
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12038" >261
        short-sm-footnote-desc  264
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12044" >262
        short-sm-long  265, 266, 267
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12014" >263, 264, 265
        short-sm-long-desc  268, 269
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12028" >266, 267
        short-sm-nolong  270, 271, 272
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23019" >268, 269, 270
        short-sm-nolong-desc  273, 274
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23047" >271, 272
        short-sm-postfootnote  275
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24186" >273
    \abbreviationsname  276
    +class="cmti-10">274
    \abbrvpluralsuffix  277
    +class="cmti-10">275
    acronym styles (glossaries):
        dua  278
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12029" >276
        dua-desc  279
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12031" >277
        footnote  280
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12033" >278
        footnote-desc  281
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12039" >279
        footnote-sc  282
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12035" >280
        footnote-sc-desc  283
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12041" >281
        footnote-sm  284
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12037" >282
        footnote-sm-desc  285
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12043" >283
        long-sc-short  286
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12003" >284
        long-sc-short-desc  287
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12017" >285
        long-short-desc  288
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12015" >286
        long-sm-short  289
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12005" >287
        long-sm-short-desc  290
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12019" >288
        long-sp-short  291, 292
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12007" >289, 290
        long-sp-short-desc  293
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12021" >291
        sc-short-long  294
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12011" >292
        sc-short-long-desc  295
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12025" >293
        short-long  296
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12009" >294
        short-long-desc  297
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12023" >295
        sm-short-long  298
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12013" >296
        sm-short-long-desc  299
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12027" >297
    amsgen package  300
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11" >298
    \apptoglossarypreamble  301
    +class="cmti-10">299

    B babel package  302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3010" >300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307
    bib2gls  310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 361, 362, 363, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 361, 364
    +class="cmbx-10">362
    bib2gls  365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 418, 363, 364, 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 419
    +class="cmbx-10">417

    C categories:
        abbreviation  420, 421, 422, 423
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9005" >418, 419, 420, 421
        acronym  424, 425, 426, 427, 428
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15021" >422, 423, 424, 425, 426
        general  429, 430, 431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 436
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8036" >427, 428, 429, 430, 431, 432, 433, 434
        index  437, 438
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5044" >435, 436
        number  439
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27018" >437
        symbol  440, 441
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8043" >438, 439
    category attributes:
        aposplural  442, 443, 444, 445
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10036" >440, 441, 442, 443
        discardperiod  446, 447, 448, 449, 450
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8031" >444, 445, 446, 447, 448
        dualindex  451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 457
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27110" >449, 450, 451, 452, 453, 454, 455
        entrycount  458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9004" >456, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466
        externallocation  469
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6037" >467
        glossdesc  470, 471, 472
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15004" >468, 469, 470
        glossdescfont  473, 474
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15005" >471, 472
        glossname  475, 476, 477
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15003" >473, 474, 475
        glossnamefont  478, 479, 480
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15009" >476, 477, 478
        headuc  481, 482, 483, 484
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11059" >479, 480, 481, 482
        hyperoutside  485, 486
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6017" >483, 484
        indexname  487, 488, 489, 490, 491
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15014" >485, 486, 487, 488, 489
        indexonlyfirst  492, 493, 494
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6005" >490, 491, 492
        insertdots  495, 496, 497
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-18004" >493, 494, 495
        markshortwords  498, 499
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27061" >496, 497
        markwords  500, 501, 502, 503, 504, 505
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24209" >498, 499, 500, 501, 502, 503
        nohyper  506, 507, 508
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27034" >504, 505, 506
        nohyperfirst  509, 510, 511, 512, 513
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24145" >507, 508, 509, 510, 511
        noshortplural  514, 515, 516, 517, 518
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10037" >512, 513, 514, 515, 516
        pluraldiscardperiod  519, 520
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27048" >517, 518
        recordcount  521, 522, 523, 524
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-35019" >519, 520, 521, 522
        regular  525, 526, 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545, 546, 547, 548, 549, 550, 551, 552, 553, 554, 555, 556
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8010" >523, 524, 525, 526, 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545, 546, 547, 548, 549, 550, 551, 552, 553, 554
        retainfirstuseperiod  557
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27050" >555
        tagging  558, 559, 560, 561
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19002" >556, 557, 558, 559
        targetcategory  562
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27119" >560
        targetname  563, 564
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27116" >561, 562
        targeturl  565, 566, 567, 568, 569
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5014" >563, 564, 565, 566, 567
        textformat  570, 571, 572
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6018" >568, 569, 570
        unitcount  573
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-28031" >571
        wrgloss  574, 575
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6013" >572, 573
    \cGLS  576
    +class="cmti-10">574
    \cGLSformat  577
    +class="cmti-10">575
    \cGLSpl  578
    +class="cmti-10">576
    \cGLSplformat  579
    +class="cmti-10">577
    convertgls2bib  580
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-31005" >578
    \csGlsXtrLetField  581
    +class="cmti-10">579
    \CustomAbbreviationFields  582
    +class="cmti-10">580

    D datatool-base package  583
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10" >581

    E \eglssetwidest  584
    +class="cmti-10">582
    \eglsupdatewidest  585
    +class="cmti-10">583
    \eGlsXtrSetField  586
    +class="cmti-10">584
    entry location  587, 588, 589
    +class="cmbx-10">585, 586, 587
    entrycounter package  590
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-39015" >588
    etoolbox package  591, 592, 593, 594, 595, 596, 597, 598
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6" >589, 590, 591, 592, 593, 594, 595, 596

    F fancyhdr package  599
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13047" >597
    first use  600, 601, 602, 603, 604, 605, 606, 607, 608, 609, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 625, 626, 627, 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638, 639, 640, 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 646, 647, 648, 598, 599, 600, 601, 602, 603, 604, 605, 606, 607, 608, 609, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 625, 626, 627, 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638, 639, 640, 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 646, 649, 650, 651
    +class="cmbx-10">647, 648, 649
    first use flag  652, 653, 654, 655, 656, 650, 651, 652, 653, 654, 657
    +class="cmbx-10">655
    first use text  658, 659
    +class="cmbx-10">656, 657
    fontenc package  660
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22024" >658

    G \gglssetwidest  661
    +class="cmti-10">659
    \gglsupdatewidest  662
    +class="cmti-10">660
    \gGlsXtrSetField  663
    +class="cmti-10">661
    glossaries package  664, 665, 666, 667, 668, 669, 670, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5032" >662, 663, 664, 665, 666, 667, 668, 669, 670, 671, 672, 673
    glossaries-accsupp package  676, 677, 678, 679, 680, 681, 682, 683, 684, 685, 686, 687, 688, 689, 690, 691
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4036" >674, 675, 676, 677, 678, 679, 680, 681, 682, 683, 684, 685, 686, 687, 688, 689
    glossaries-extra package  692, 693
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5034" >690, 691
    glossaries-extra-stylemods package  694, 695, 696, 697, 698, 699, 700
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4027" >692, 693, 694, 695, 696, 697, 698
    glossaries-prefix package  701, 702, 703
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41001" >699, 700, 701
    \glossariesextrasetup  704
    +class="cmti-10">702
    glossary styles:
        altlist  705
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17022" >703
        alttree  706, 707, 708, 709, 710, 711, 712
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17032" >704, 705, 706, 707, 708, 709, 710
        bookindex  713, 714, 715, 716
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13002" >711, 712, 713, 714
        index  717
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17027" >715
        inline  718, 719
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17006" >716, 717
        list  720, 721
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17018" >718, 719
        listdotted  722
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17023" >720
        long  723
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17012" >721
        long3col  724
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17004" >722
        mcolindexgroup  725
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13003" >723
        tree  726
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17028" >724
    glossary-bookindex package  727, 728
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13001" >725, 726
    glossary-inline package  729
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17007" >727
    glossary-tree package  730, 731, 732, 733
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13040" >728, 729, 730, 731
    \glossentrynameother  734
    +class="cmti-10">732
    \glossxtrsetpopts  735
    +class="cmti-10">733
    \glsabbrvdefaultfont  736, 734, 737
    +class="cmti-10">735
    \glsabbrvemfont  738
    +class="cmti-10">736
    \glsabbrvfont  739
    +class="cmti-10">737
    \glsabbrvhyphenfont  740
    +class="cmti-10">738
    \glsabbrvonlyfont  741
    +class="cmti-10">739
    \glsabbrvscfont  742
    +class="cmti-10">740
    \glsabbrvsmfont  743
    +class="cmti-10">741
    \glsabbrvuserfont  744, 745
    +class="cmti-10">742, 743
    \Glsaccessdesc  746
    +class="cmti-10">744
    \glsaccessdesc  747
    +class="cmti-10">745
    \Glsaccessdescplural  748
    +class="cmti-10">746
    \glsaccessdescplural  749
    +class="cmti-10">747
    \Glsaccessfirst  750
    +class="cmti-10">748
    \glsaccessfirst  751
    +class="cmti-10">749
    \Glsaccessfirstplural  752
    +class="cmti-10">750
    \glsaccessfirstplural  753
    +class="cmti-10">751
    \Glsaccesslong  754
    +class="cmti-10">752
    \glsaccesslong  755
    +class="cmti-10">753
    \Glsaccesslongpl  756
    +class="cmti-10">754
    \glsaccesslongpl  757
    +class="cmti-10">755
    \Glsaccessname  758
    +class="cmti-10">756
    \glsaccessname  759
    +class="cmti-10">757
    \Glsaccessplural  760
    +class="cmti-10">758
    \glsaccessplural  761
    +class="cmti-10">759
    \Glsaccessshort  762
    +class="cmti-10">760
    \glsaccessshort  763
    +class="cmti-10">761
    \Glsaccessshortpl  764
    +class="cmti-10">762
    \glsaccessshortpl  765
    +class="cmti-10">763
    \Glsaccesssymbol  766
    +class="cmti-10">764
    \glsaccesssymbol  767
    +class="cmti-10">765
    \Glsaccesssymbolplural  768
    +class="cmti-10">766
    \glsaccesssymbolplural  769
    +class="cmti-10">767
    \Glsaccesstext  770
    +class="cmti-10">768
    \glsaccesstext  771
    +class="cmti-10">769
    \glsacspace  772
    +class="cmti-10">770
    \glsacspacemax  773
    +class="cmti-10">771
    \glsadd options
        format  774
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8071" >772
        theHvalue  775, 776
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6022" >773, 774
        thevalue  777, 778, 779, 780, 781
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6021" >775, 776, 777, 778, 779
    \glscategory  782
    +class="cmti-10">780
    \glscategorylabel  783
    +class="cmti-10">781
    \glscurrententrylabel  784
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15022" >782
    \glscurrentfieldvalue  785
    +class="cmti-10">783
    \glsentrycurrcount  786
    +class="cmti-10">784
    \glsentryprevcount  787
    +class="cmti-10">785
    \glsentryprevmaxcount  788
    +class="cmti-10">786
    \glsentryprevtotalcount  789
    +class="cmti-10">787
    +\glsextrapostnamehook  788
    \glsFindWidestAnyName  790
    +class="cmti-10">789
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation  791
    +class="cmti-10">790
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol  792
    +class="cmti-10">791
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation  793
    +class="cmti-10">792
    \glsFindWidestLevelTwo  794
    +class="cmti-10">793
    \glsFindWidestTopLevelName  795
    +class="cmti-10">794
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName  796
    +class="cmti-10">795
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation  797
    +class="cmti-10">796
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol  798
    +class="cmti-10">797
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation  799
    +class="cmti-10">798
    \glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo  800
    +class="cmti-10">799
    \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName  801
    +class="cmti-10">800
    \glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont  802
    +class="cmti-10">801
    \glsfirstabbrvemfont  803
    +class="cmti-10">802
    \glsfirstabbrvfont  804
    +class="cmti-10">803
    \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont  805
    +class="cmti-10">804
    \glsfirstabbrvonlyfont  806
    +class="cmti-10">805
    \glsfirstabbrvsmfont  807
    -\glsfirstabbrvuserfont  808
    +class="cmti-10">806
    +\glsfirstabbrvuserfont  807
    \glsfirstlongdefaultfont  809
    +class="cmti-10">808
    \glsfirstlongemfont  810
    +class="cmti-10">809
    \glsfirstlongfont  811
    +class="cmti-10">810
    \glsfirstlongfootnotefont  812
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24152" >811
    \glsfirstlonghyphenfont  813
    +class="cmti-10">812
    \glsfirstlongonlyfont  814
    +class="cmti-10">813
    \glsfirstlonguserfont  815
    +class="cmti-10">814
    \Glsfmtfirst  816
    +class="cmti-10">815
    \glsfmtfirst  817
    +class="cmti-10">816
    \Glsfmtfirstpl  818
    +class="cmti-10">817
    \glsfmtfirstpl  819
    +class="cmti-10">818
    \Glsfmtfull  820
    +class="cmti-10">819
    \glsfmtfull  821
    +class="cmti-10">820
    \Glsfmtfullpl  822
    +class="cmti-10">821
    \glsfmtfullpl  823
    +class="cmti-10">822
    \Glsfmtlong  824
    +class="cmti-10">823
    \glsfmtlong  825
    +class="cmti-10">824
    \Glsfmtlongpl  826
    +class="cmti-10">825
    \glsfmtlongpl  827
    +class="cmti-10">826
    \Glsfmtname  828
    +class="cmti-10">827
    \glsfmtname  829
    +class="cmti-10">828
    \Glsfmtplural  830
    +class="cmti-10">829
    \glsfmtplural  831
    +class="cmti-10">830
    \Glsfmtshort  832
    +class="cmti-10">831
    \glsfmtshort  833
    +class="cmti-10">832
    \Glsfmtshortpl  834
    +class="cmti-10">833
    \glsfmtshortpl  835
    +class="cmti-10">834
    \Glsfmttext  836
    +class="cmti-10">835
    \glsfmttext  837
    +class="cmti-10">836
    \glsforeachwithattribute  838
    +class="cmti-10">837
    \glsgetattribute  839
    +class="cmti-10">838
    \glsgetcategoryattribute  840
    +class="cmti-10">839
    \glsgetwidestname  841
    +class="cmti-10">840
    \glsgetwidestsubname  842
    +class="cmti-10">841
    \glshasattribute  843
    +class="cmti-10">842
    \glshascategoryattribute  844
    +class="cmti-10">843
    \glshex  845
    +class="cmti-10">844
    \glsifattribute  846
    +class="cmti-10">845
    \glsifcategory  847
    +class="cmti-10">846
    \glsifcategoryattribute  848
    +class="cmti-10">847
    \glsifnotregular  849
    +class="cmti-10">848
    \glsifnotregularcategory  850
    +class="cmti-10">849
    \glsifregular  851
    +class="cmti-10">850
    \glsifregularcategory  852
    +class="cmti-10">851
    \glskeylisttok  853
    -\glslabeltok  854
    +class="cmti-10">852
    +\glslabeltok  853
    \glslink options
        format  855, 856, 857, 858
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6034" >854, 855, 856, 857
        hyper  859, 860, 861
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11055" >858, 859, 860
        hyper=false  862
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-26016" >861
        hyperoutside  863, 864
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6016" >862, 863
        noindex  865, 866, 867, 868, 869, 870, 871
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6001" >864, 865, 866, 867, 868, 869, 870
        theHvalue  872
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6025" >871
        thevalue  873
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6024" >872
        wrgloss  874, 875, 876, 877
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6009" >873, 874, 875, 876
    \glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook  878
    +class="cmti-10">877
    \glslistchildpostlocation  879
    +class="cmti-10">878
    \glslistchildprelocation  880
    +class="cmti-10">879
    \glslongdefaultfont  881
    +class="cmti-10">880
    \glslongemfont  882
    +class="cmti-10">881
    \glslongfont  883
    +class="cmti-10">882
    \glslongfootnotefont  884
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24154" >883
    \glslonghyphenfont  885
    +class="cmti-10">884
    \glslongonlyfont  886
    +class="cmti-10">885
    \glslongpltok  887
    +class="cmti-10">886
    \glslongtok  888
    +class="cmti-10">887
    \glslonguserfont  889
    +class="cmti-10">888
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc  890
    +class="cmti-10">889
    \glsps  891
    +class="cmti-10">890
    \glspt  892
    +class="cmti-10">891
    \glsseeitemformat  893
    +class="cmti-10">892
    \glssetattribute  894
    +class="cmti-10">893
    \glssetcategoryattribute  895
    +class="cmti-10">894
    \glssetregularcategory  896
    +class="cmti-10">895
    \glsshortpltok  897
    +class="cmti-10">896
    \glsshorttok  898
    +class="cmti-10">897
    \glstreechildprelocation  899
    +class="cmti-10">898
    \glstreeprelocation  900
    +class="cmti-10">899
    \glsupdatewidest  901
    +class="cmti-10">900
    \glsuseabbrvfont  902
    +class="cmti-10">901
    \glsuselongfont  903
    +class="cmti-10">902
    \Glsxtr  904
    +class="cmti-10">903
    \glsxtr  905
    +class="cmti-10">904
    \glsxtrabbrvfootnote  906
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24155" >905
    \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix  907, 906, 908
    +class="cmti-10">907
    \glsxtractivatenopost  909
    +class="cmti-10">908
    \glsxtraddallcrossrefs  910
    +class="cmti-10">909
    \glsxtralias  911
    +class="cmti-10">910
    \glsxtrAltTreeIndent  912
    +class="cmti-10">911
    \glsxtralttreeInit  913
    +class="cmti-10">912
    \glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation  914
    -\glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation  915
    +class="cmti-10">913
    +\glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation  914
    \glsxtrautoindex  916
    +class="cmti-10">915
    \glsxtrautoindexassignsort  917
    +class="cmti-10">916
    \glsxtrautoindexentry  918
    +class="cmti-10">917
    \glsxtrbookindexatendgroup  919
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13030" >918
    \glsxtrbookindexbetween  920
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13025" >919
    \glsxtrbookindexbookmark  921
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13037" >920
    \glsxtrbookindexcols  922
    +class="cmti-10">921
    \glsxtrbookindexcolspread  923
    +class="cmti-10">922
    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmark  924
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13043" >923
    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt  925
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13045" >924
    \glsxtrbookindexformatheader  926
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13039" >925
    \glsxtrbookindexlastmark  927
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13044" >926
    \glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt  928
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13046" >927
    \glsxtrbookindexmarkentry  928
    +\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv  929
    \glsxtrbookindexname  930
    \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep  931
    \glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep  932
    \glsxtrbookindexprelocation  933
    \glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup  934
    \glsxtrbookindexsubbetween  935
    \glsxtrbookindexsubname  936
    \glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation  937
    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup  938
    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween  939
    \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst  958
    class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrendfor  959
    + + + \glsxtrentryfmt  960
    class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfielddolistloop  961
    - - - \glsxtrfieldforlistloop  \GlsXtrFmtField  974
    \glsxtrfootnotename  975
    +\glsxtrforcsvfield  975
    +class="cmti-10">976
    \GlsXtrFormatLocationList  976
    +class="cmti-10">977
    \GLSxtrfull  977
    +class="cmti-10">978
    \Glsxtrfull  978
    +class="cmti-10">979
    \glsxtrfull  979
    +class="cmti-10">980
    \Glsxtrfullformat  980
    +class="cmti-10">981
    \glsxtrfullformat  981
    +class="cmti-10">982
    \GLSxtrfullpl  982
    +class="cmti-10">983
    \Glsxtrfullpl  983
    +class="cmti-10">984
    \glsxtrfullpl  984
    +class="cmti-10">985
    \Glsxtrfullplformat  985
    +class="cmti-10">986
    \glsxtrfullplformat  986
    +class="cmti-10">987
    \glsxtrfullsep  987
    +class="cmti-10">988
    \glsxtrglossentry  988
    +class="cmti-10">989
    \glsxtrglossentryother  989
    +class="cmti-10">990
    \glsxtrhyphensuffix  990
    +class="cmti-10">991
    \glsxtrifcounttrigger  991
    +class="cmti-10">992
    \glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod  992
    +class="cmti-10">993
    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr  993
    +class="cmti-10">994
    \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef  994
    +class="cmti-10">995
    \glsxtrifhasfield  995
    +class="cmti-10">996
    \glsxtrifhasfield*  996
    +class="cmti-10">997
    \glsxtrifkeydefined  997
    +class="cmti-10">998
    \glsxtriflabelinlist  998
    +class="cmti-10">999
    \glsxtrifrecordtrigger  999
    +class="cmti-10">1000
    \glsxtrifwasfirstuse  1000
    +class="cmti-10">1001
    \glsxtrindexaliased  1001
    +class="cmti-10">1002
    \glsxtrindexseealso  1002
    +class="cmti-10">1003
    \glsxtrinitwrgloss  1003
    +class="cmti-10">1004
    \Glsxtrinlinefullformat  1004
    +class="cmti-10">1005
    + + + \glsxtrinlinefullformat  1005
    +class="cmti-10">1006
    \Glsxtrinlinefullplformat  1006
    +class="cmti-10">1007
    \glsxtrinlinefullplformat  1007
    - - - +class="cmti-10">1008
    \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue  1008
    +class="cmti-10">1009
    \GlsXtrLetField  1009
    +class="cmti-10">1010
    \GlsXtrLetFieldToField  1010
    +class="cmti-10">1011
    \GlsXtrLoadResources  1011
    +class="cmti-10">1012
    \glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle  1012
    +class="cmti-10">1013
    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount  1013
    +class="cmti-10">1014
    \glsxtrlocrangefmt  1014
    +class="cmti-10">1015
    \Glsxtrlong  1015, 1016, 1016
    +class="cmti-10">1017
    \glsxtrlong  1017
    +class="cmti-10">1018
    \glsxtrlonghyphen  1018
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24229" >1019
    \glsxtrlonghyphenshort  1019
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24210" >1020
    +\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname  1021
    +\glsxtrlongnoshortname  1022
    \GLSxtrlongpl  1020
    +class="cmti-10">1023
    \Glsxtrlongpl  1021
    +class="cmti-10">1024
    \glsxtrlongpl  1022
    +class="cmti-10">1025
    +\glsxtrlongshortdescname  1026
    \glsxtrlongshortdescsort  1023
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24056" >1027
    +\glsxtrlongshortname  1028
    +\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname  1029
    \glsxtrnewgls  1024
    +class="cmti-10">1030
    \glsxtrnewGLSlike  1025
    +class="cmti-10">1031
    \glsxtrnewglslike  1026
    +class="cmti-10">1032
    \glsxtrnewnumber  1027
    +class="cmti-10">1033
    \glsxtrnewrgls  1028
    +class="cmti-10">1034
    \glsxtrnewrGLSlike  1029
    +class="cmti-10">1035
    \glsxtrnewrglslike  1030
    +class="cmti-10">1036
    \glsxtrnewsymbol  1031
    +class="cmti-10">1037
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake  1032
    +class="cmti-10">1038
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo  1033
    +class="cmti-10">1039
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile  1034
    +class="cmti-10">1040
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain  1035
    +class="cmti-10">1041
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain  1036
    +class="cmti-10">1042
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart  1037
    +class="cmti-10">1043
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningHead  1038
    +class="cmti-10">1044
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch  1039
    +class="cmti-10">1045
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut  1040
    +class="cmti-10">1046
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail  1041
    +class="cmti-10">1047
    \glsxtrnopostpunc  1042
    +class="cmti-10">1048
    +\glsxtronlydescname  1049
    +\glsxtronlyname  1050
    \glsxtronlysuffix  1043
    +class="cmti-10">1051
    \glsxtrorglong  1044
    +class="cmti-10">1052
    + + + \glsxtrorgshort  1045
    +class="cmti-10">1053
    \Glsxtrp  1046, 1054, 1047
    +class="cmti-10">1055
    \glsxtrp  1048
    +class="cmti-10">1056
    \glsxtrpageref  1049
    +class="cmti-10">1057
    \glsxtrparen  1050
    +class="cmti-10">1058
    \Glsxtrpl  1051
    +class="cmti-10">1059
    \glsxtrpl  1052
    +class="cmti-10">1060
    \glsxtrpostdescription  1053
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15018" >1061
    \glsxtrposthyphenlong  1054
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24242" >1062
    \glsxtrposthyphenshort  1055
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24227" >1063
    \glsxtrpostlink  1056
    +class="cmti-10">1064
    \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse  1057
    +class="cmti-10">1065
    \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse  1058
    +class="cmti-10">1066
    \glsxtrpostlinkendsentence  1059
    +class="cmti-10">1067
    \glsxtrpostlinkhook  1060
    +class="cmti-10">1068
    \glsxtrpostlongdescription  1061
    +class="cmti-10">1069
    \glsxtrpostnamehook  1062
    +class="cmti-10">1070
    \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation  1063
    +class="cmti-10">1071
    \glsxtrprelocation  1064, 1072, 1065
    +class="cmti-10">1073
    \glsxtrprovidestoragekey  1066
    +class="cmti-10">1074
    \GlsXtrRecordCount  1067
    +class="cmti-10">1075
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter  1068
    +class="cmti-10">1076
    \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue  1069
    +class="cmti-10">1077
    \glsxtrregularfont  1070
    +class="cmti-10">1078
    \glsxtrresourcefile  1071
    +class="cmti-10">1079
    \glsxtrresourceinit  1072
    +class="cmti-10">1080
    \glsxtrrestorepostpunc  1073
    +class="cmti-10">1081
    \glsxtrRevertMarks  1074
    +class="cmti-10">1082
    \glsxtrscsuffix  1075
    +class="cmti-10">1083
    \glsxtrseealsolabels  1076
    +class="cmti-10">1084
    \glsxtrseelist  1077
    +class="cmti-10">1085
    \GlsXtrSetActualChar  1078
    +class="cmti-10">1086
    \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex  1079
    +class="cmti-10">1087
    \GlsXtrSetAltModifier  1080
    +class="cmti-10">1088
    \glsxtrsetcategory  1081
    +class="cmti-10">1089
    \glsxtrsetcategoryforall  1082
    +class="cmti-10">1090
    \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts  1083
    +class="cmti-10">1091
    \GlsXtrSetEncapChar  1084
    +class="cmti-10">1092
    \GlsXtrSetEscChar  1085
    +class="cmti-10">1093
    \GlsXtrSetField  1086
    +class="cmti-10">1094
    \glsxtrsetfieldifexists  1087
    +class="cmti-10">1095
    \glsxtrsetgrouptitle  1088
    +class="cmti-10">1096
    \GlsXtrSetLevelChar  1089
    +class="cmti-10">1097
    \glsxtrsetpopts  1090
    +class="cmti-10">1098
    \GlsXtrSetRecordCountAttribute  1091
    +class="cmti-10">1099
    \Glsxtrshort  1092, 1100, 1093
    +class="cmti-10">1101
    + + + \glsxtrshort  1094
    +class="cmti-10">1102
    +\glsxtrshortdescname  1103
    \glsxtrshorthyphenlong  1095
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24235" >1104
    +\glsxtrshortlongdescname  1105
    +\glsxtrshortlongname  1106, 1107
    +\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname  1108
    +\glsxtrshortnolongname  1109
    \GLSxtrshortpl  1096
    +class="cmti-10">1110
    \Glsxtrshortpl  1097
    +class="cmti-10">1111
    \glsxtrshortpl  1098
    +class="cmti-10">1112
    \glsxtrsmsuffix  1099
    +class="cmti-10">1113
    \Glsxtrsubsequentfmt  1100
    +class="cmti-10">1114
    \glsxtrsubsequentfmt  1101
    +class="cmti-10">1115
    \Glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  1102
    +class="cmti-10">1116
    \glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  1103
    - - - +class="cmti-10">1117
    \glsxtrtagfont  1104
    +class="cmti-10">1118
    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount  1105
    +class="cmti-10">1119
    \glsxtrunsrtdo  1106
    +class="cmti-10">1120
    \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts  1107
    +class="cmti-10">1121
    \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup  1108
    +class="cmti-10">1122
    \Glsxtrusefield  1109
    +class="cmti-10">1123
    \glsxtrusefield  1110
    +class="cmti-10">1124
    \glsxtruserfield  1111
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24033" >1125
    \glsxtruserparen  1112
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24036" >1126
    \glsxtrusersuffix  1113, 1114
    +class="cmti-10">1127, 1128
    \glsxtrusesee  1115
    +class="cmti-10">1129
    \glsxtruseseealso  1116
    +class="cmti-10">1130
    \glsxtruseseeformat  1117, 1131, 1118
    +class="cmti-10">1132
    \GlsXtrWarnDeprecatedAbbrStyle  1119
    +class="cmti-10">1133
    \GlsXtrWarning  1120
    +class="cmti-10">1134
    \glsxtrword  1121
    +class="cmti-10">1135
    \glsxtrwordsep  1122
    +class="cmti-10">1136
    \glsxtrwrglossmark  1123
    +class="cmti-10">1137

    H hyperref package  1124, 1125, 1126, 1127, 1128, 1129, 1130, 1131, 1132, 1133, 1134, 1135, 1136, 1137, 1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1142, 1143
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6033" >1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1142, 1143, 1144, 1145, 1146, 1147, 1148, 1149, 1150, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154, 1155, 1156, 1157

    I \ifglsxtrinitwrglossbefore  1144
    +class="cmti-10">1158
    inputenc package  1145
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33018" >1159

    L link-text  1146, 1147, 1148, 1149, 1150, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154, 1155, 1156, 1157, 1158, 1159, 1160, 1161, 1162, 1163, 1160, 1161, 1162, 1163, 1164, 1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1169, 1170, 1171, 1172, 1173, 1174, 1175, 1176, 1177, 1164
    +class="cmbx-10">1178
    + + + location list  1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1179, 1180, 1181, 1182, 1169
    +class="cmbx-10">1183
    \longnewglossaryentry  1170
    +class="cmti-10">1184

    M makeglossaries  1171, 1172, 1173, 1174, 1185, 1186, 1187, 1188, 1175
    +class="cmbx-10">1189
    \makeglossaries  1176
    +class="cmti-10">1190
    makeglossaries-lite  1177, 1191, 1178
    +class="cmbx-10">1192
    makeglossaries-lite  1179, 1193, 1180
    +class="cmbx-10">1194
    makeindex  1181, 1182, 1183, 1184, 1185, 1186, 1187, 1188, 1189, 1190, 1191, 1192, 1195, 1196, 1197, 1198, 1199, 1200, 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204, 1205, 1206, 1193
    +class="cmbx-10">1207
    makeindex  1194, 1195, 1196, 1197
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6028" >1208, 1209, 1210, 1211
    memoir class  1198
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3021" >1212
    mfirstuc package  1199, 1200, 1201
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5" >1213, 1214, 1215

    N - - - \newabbreviation  1202
    +class="cmti-10">1216
    \newabbreviationstyle  1203
    +class="cmti-10">1217
    \newacronym  1204
    +class="cmti-10">1218
    \newglossaryentry options
        alias  1205, 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209, 1210
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5021" >1219, 1220, 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224
        category  1211, 1212, 1213, 1214, 1215, 1216
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5020" >1225, 1226, 1227, 1228, 1229, 1230
        desc  1217, 1218
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43038" >1231, 1232
        descplural  1219, 1220
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43042" >1233, 1234
        description  1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, 1225, 1226, 1227, 1228, 1229, 1230, 1231, 1232, 1233, 1234, 1235, 1236, 1237, 1238, 1239, 1240
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5002" >1235, 1236, 1237, 1238, 1239, 1240, 1241, 1242, 1243, 1244, 1245, 1246, 1247, 1248, 1249, 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1254
        descriptionplural  1241, 1242, 1243, 1244
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5030" >1255, 1256, 1257, 1258
        first  1245, 1246, 1247, 1248, 1249, 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1254, 1255, 1256, 1257
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8013" >1259, 1260, 1261, 1262, 1263, 1264, 1265, 1266, 1267, 1268, 1269, 1270, 1271
        firstplural  1258, 1259, 1260, 1261, 1262, 1263, 1264, 1265, 1266, 1267
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8014" >1272, 1273, 1274, 1275, 1276, 1277, 1278, 1279, 1280, 1281
        location  1268, 1269
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13021" >1282, 1283
        loclist  1270
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38025" >1284
        long  1271, 1272, 1273, 1274, 1275, 1276, 1277, 1278, 1279
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10026" >1285, 1286, 1287, 1288, 1289, 1290, 1291, 1292, 1293
        longplural  1280, 1281, 1282, 1283, 1284, 1285
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10010" >1294, 1295, 1296, 1297, 1298, 1299
        name  1286, 1287, 1288, 1289, 1290, 1291, 1292, 1293, 1294, 1295, 1296, 1297, 1298, 1299, 1300, 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304, 1305, 1306, 1307, 1308, 1309, 1310, 1311, 1312, 1313, 1314, 1315, 1316, 1317
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5007" >1300, 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304, 1305, 1306, 1307, 1308, 1309, 1310, 1311, 1312, 1313, 1314, 1315, 1316, 1317, 1318, 1319, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1323, 1324, 1325, 1326, 1327, 1328, 1329, 1330, 1331, 1332, 1333, 1334, 1335, 1336, 1337, 1338, 1339, 1340, 1341, 1342, 1343, 1344, 1345, 1346, 1347, 1348, 1349
        parent  1318, 1319, 1320
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17054" >1350, 1351, 1352
        plural  1321, 1322, 1323, 1324, 1325, 1326, 1327, 1328, 1329, 1330, 1331, 1332, 1333
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8017" >1353, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1358, 1359, 1360, 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365
        see  1334, 1335, 1336, 1337, 1338, 1339, 1340, 1341, 1342, 1343, 1344, 1345, 1346, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1350, 1351, 1352, 1353, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1358, 1359, 1360
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4054" >1366, 1367, 1368, 1369, 1370, 1371, 1372, 1373, 1374, 1375, 1376, 1377, 1378, 1379, 1380, 1381, 1382, 1383, 1384, 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1389, 1390, 1391, 1392
        seealso  1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367, 1368, 1369, 1370
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4055" >1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401, 1402
        short  1371, 1372, 1373, 1374, 1375, 1376, 1377, 1378, 1379, 1380, 1381, 1382, 1383, 1384
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8011" >1403, 1404, 1405, 1406, 1407, 1408, 1409, 1410, 1411, 1412, 1413, 1414, 1415, 1416
        shortplural  1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1389, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10011" >1417, 1418, 1419, 1420, 1421, 1422, 1423, 1424, 1425, 1426, 1427, 1428, 1429, 1430, 1431
        sort  1400, 1401, 1402, 1403, 1404, 1405, 1406, 1407, 1408, 1409, 1410, 1411, 1412, 1413, 1414, 1415, 1416
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4124" >1432, 1433, 1434, 1435, 1436, 1437, 1438, 1439, 1440, 1441, 1442, 1443, 1444, 1445, 1446, 1447, 1448
        symbol  1417, 1418, 1419
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43030" >1449, 1450, 1451
        symbolplural  1420, 1421
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43034" >1452, 1453
        text  1422, 1423, 1424, 1425, 1426, 1427, 1428, 1429, 1430, 1431, 1432, 1433, 1434
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5009" >1454, 1455, 1456, 1457, 1458, 1459, 1460, 1461, 1462, 1463, 1464, 1465, 1466
    + + +     type  1435, 1436
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12046" >1467, 1468
        user1  1437, 1438, 1439
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22080" >1469, 1470, 1471
    number list  1440, 1441, 1442, 1443, 1444, 1445, 1446, 1447, 1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 1452, 1453, 1454, 1455, 1456, 1457, 1458, 1459, 1460, 1461, 1462, 1463, 1464, 1465, 1466, 1467, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1475, 1476, 1477, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1483, 1484, 1485, 1486, 1487, 1488, 1489, 1490, 1491, 1492, 1493, 1494, 1495, 1496, 1497, 1498, 1499, 1468
    +class="cmbx-10">1500

    P package options:
        abbreviations  1469, 1470, 1471, 1472, 1473
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4136" >1501, 1502, 1503, 1504, 1505
        accsupp  1474, 1475, 1476, 1477
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4035" >1506, 1507, 1508, 1509
        acronym  1478
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4144" >1510
        acronymlists  1479
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4148" >1511
        automake  1480, 1481
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5054" >1512, 1513
        autoseeindex  1482, 1483
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4064" >1514, 1515
            false  1484, 1485
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4056" >1516, 1517
        debug  1486
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4002" >1518
            all  1487, 1488
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4005" >1519, 1520
            showtargets  1489, 1490
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4003" >1521, 1522
            showwrgloss  1491, 1492, 1493
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4004" >1523, 1524, 1525
            true  1494
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4007" >1526
        docdef  1495, 1496, 1497, 1498
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4104" >1527, 1528, 1529, 1530
            restricted  1499, 1500
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4117" >1531, 1532
            true  1501, 1502
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4132" >1533, 1534
        docdefs  1503, 1504, 1505
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-30003" >1535, 1536, 1537
            true  1506
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4116" >1538
        entrycounter  1507, 1508
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-36002" >1539, 1540
        hyperfirst
            false  1509
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-27030" >1541
        index  1510, 1511
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5043" >1542, 1543
        indexcrossrefs  1512, 1513, 1514, 1515
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4053" >1544, 1545, 1546, 1547
            false  1516
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4063" >1548
        indexonlyfirst  1517, 1518, 1519, 1520
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6002" >1549, 1550, 1551, 1552
        nogroupskip  1521
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17014" >1553
        nomain  1522
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3032" >1554
        nomissingglstext  1523
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4135" >1555
        nonumberlist  1524, 1525, 1526, 1527
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7026" >1556, 1557, 1558, 1559
        nopostdot  1528, 1529, 1530, 1531
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4023" >1560, 1561, 1562, 1563
            false  1532, 1533, 1534
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3004" >1564, 1565, 1566
            true  1535
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3003" >1567
        noredefwarn
            false  1536
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3009" >1568
            true  1537
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3006" >1569
        notree  1538
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17034" >1570
        numbers  1539, 1540, 1541
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4152" >1571, 1572, 1573
        postdot  1542, 1543, 1544
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3005" >1574, 1575, 1576
        postpunc  1545, 1546, 1547
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4019" >1577, 1578, 1579
    + + +         comma  1548
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4020" >1580
            dot  1549
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4021" >1581
            none  1550
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4022" >1582
        record  1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1555, 1556
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4062" >1583, 1584, 1585, 1586, 1587, 1588
            alsoindex  1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, 1562
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4009" >1589, 1590, 1591, 1592, 1593, 1594
            off  1563, 1564
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5049" >1595, 1596
            only  1565, 1566, 1567, 1568, 1569, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4067" >1597, 1598, 1599, 1600, 1601, 1602, 1603, 1604, 1605
        section
            chapter  1574
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13038" >1606
        seeautonumberlist  1575
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7027" >1607
        seenoindex  1576
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7016" >1608
            ignore  1577, 1578
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7018" >1609, 1610
            warn  1579
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38012" >1611
        shortcuts  1580, 1581
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4154" >1612, 1613
            abbr  1582, 1583
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4160" >1614, 1615
            abbreviation  1584, 1585
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-21001" >1616, 1617
            abbreviations  1586, 1587
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4159" >1618, 1619
            ac  1588, 1589, 1590, 1591, 1592, 1593
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4157" >1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625
            acro  1594
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4156" >1626
            acronyms  1595
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4155" >1627
            all  1596
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4170" >1628
            false  1597
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4176" >1629
            none  1598
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4175" >1630
            other  1599, 1600
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4161" >1631, 1632
            true  1601
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4171" >1633
        sort
            none  1602, 1603
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4089" >1634, 1635
        stylemods  1604, 1605, 1606, 1607, 1608
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4044" >1636, 1637, 1638, 1639, 1640
            all  1609
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4047" >1641
            default  1610
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4046" >1642
        subentrycounter  1611, 1612
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-36003" >1643, 1644
        symbols  1613, 1614, 1615
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4149" >1645, 1646, 1647
        toc
            false  1616
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3002" >1648
            true  1617
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3001" >1649
        translate
            babel  1618
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3011" >1650
            true  1619
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3013" >1651
        undefaction  1620, 1621
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4048" >1652, 1653
            error  1622, 1623
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4049" >1654, 1655
            warn  1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, 1628, 1629
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4050" >1656, 1657, 1658, 1659, 1660, 1661
        xindy  1630
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7046" >1662
    page (counter)  1631, 1632
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-28028" >1663, 1664
    polyglossia package  1633
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45005" >1665
    \pretoglossarypreamble  1634
    +class="cmti-10">1666
    \printabbreviations  1635
    +class="cmti-10">1667
    + + + \printglossary options
        nogroupskip  1636
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17015" >1668
        target  1637, 1638
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5018" >1669, 1670
        targetnameprefix  1639
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5019" >1671
        title  1640
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45006" >1672
    \printnoidxglossary options
        sort  1641
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38015" >1673
    \printunsrtglossaries  1642
    +class="cmti-10">1674
    \printunsrtglossary  1643
    +class="cmti-10">1675
    \printunsrtglossary*  1644
    +class="cmti-10">1676
    \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook  1645
    +class="cmti-10">1677
    \printunsrtglossaryhandler  1646
    +class="cmti-10">1678
    \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary  1647
    +class="cmti-10">1679
    \printunsrtglossaryskipentry  1648
    - - - +class="cmti-10">1680
    \printunsrtglossaryunit  1649
    +class="cmti-10">1681
    \printunsrtglossaryunitsetup  1650
    +class="cmti-10">1682
    \provideignoredglossary  1651
    +class="cmti-10">1683

    R relsizes package  1652
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-22048" >1684
    \RestoreAcronyms  1653
    +class="cmti-10">1685
    \rGLS  1654
    +class="cmti-10">1686
    \rGls  1655
    +class="cmti-10">1687
    \rgls  1656
    +class="cmti-10">1688
    \rGLSformat  1657
    +class="cmti-10">1689
    \rGlsformat  1658
    +class="cmti-10">1690
    \rglsformat  1659
    +class="cmti-10">1691
    \rGLSpl  1660
    +class="cmti-10">1692
    \rGlspl  1661
    +class="cmti-10">1693
    \rglspl  1662
    +class="cmti-10">1694
    \rGLSplformat  1663
    +class="cmti-10">1695
    \rGlsplformat  1664
    +class="cmti-10">1696
    \rglsplformat  1665
    +class="cmti-10">1697

    S \setabbreviationstyle  1666
    +class="cmti-10">1698
    slantsc package  1667
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-26020" >1699
    style package  1668
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13005" >1700
    subentrycounter package  1669
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-39016" >1701

    T textcase package  1670
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8" >1702
    tracklang package  1671, 1672, 1673
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4" >1703, 1704, 1705
    + + + translator package  1674
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3012" >1706

    X xfor package  1675, 1676, 1677
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9" >1707, 1708, 1709
    \xglssetwidest  1678
    +class="cmti-10">1710
    \xglsupdatewidest  1679
    +class="cmti-10">1711
    \xGlsXtrSetField  1680
    +class="cmti-10">1712
    xindy  1681, 1682, 1683, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1687, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1713, 1714, 1715, 1716, 1717, 1718, 1719, 1720, 1721, 1722, 1691
    +class="cmbx-10">1723
    xindy  1692
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6032" >1724
    xkeyval package  1693
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7" >1725

    - - -

    1.1field and the short form was stored in the symbol field.

    -

    3.1For compatibility with earlier versions, \glsabbrvscfont \glsxtrscfont is now deprecated. Likewise for similar commands.

    -

    9.1Version 1.11 only allowed one use of \GlsXtrLoadResources per document.

    -

    9.2v1.08 assumed filename#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}} \DeleteShortVerb{\|} \MakeShortVerb{"} - \title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.24: + \title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.25: an extension to the glossaries package} \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] Dickimaw Books\\ \url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/}} - \date{2017-11-14} + \date{2017-11-24} \maketitle \begin{abstract} @@ -2535,7 +2535,15 @@ the command \cs{glsxtrbookindexcolspread} \end{definition} isn't empty then it's supplied as the optional argument -following \verb|\begin{multicols}|\marg{n}. +following \verb|\begin{multicols}|\marg{n}. You can switch from +\env{multicols} to \env{multicols*} by redefining +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv] +\cs{glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv} +\end{definition} +For example +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols*} +\end{verbatim} Each top-level entry is displayed using \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrbookindexname] @@ -2845,6 +2853,13 @@ the \qt{symbol} category: \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostnamesymbol}{\space (\glsentrysymbol{\glscurrententrylabel})} \end{verbatim} +As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsextrapostnamehook] +\cs{glsextrapostnamehook}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +(before \cs{glsxtrpostname}\meta{category}) +to allow for additional non-category related code. This does nothing +by default. The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also does @@ -3998,7 +4013,19 @@ defined with any of these styles. \begin{description} \item[\abbrstyledef{short-nolong}] This only displays the short form on \gls{firstuse}. The \gloskey{name} -is set to the short form. The \gloskey{description} is set to the +is set to the short form through the command +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortnolongname] +\cs{glsxtrshortnolongname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for the other +\texttt{short}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-nolong}\meta{modifier} styles, +unless indicated otherwise.) +This command is expanded as the entry is defined, so any +redefinition must be done before \cs{newabbreviation} (or +\cs{newacronym}) for it to take effect. Make sure to \cs{protect} +any formatting commands (or anything else that shouldn't be expanded). + +The \gloskey{description} is set to the long form. The inline full form displays \meta{short} (\meta{long}). The long form on its own can be displayed through commands like \ics{glsxtrlong}. @@ -4017,7 +4044,10 @@ use \ics{glsabbrvscfont} (which defaults to \cs{textsc}). \item[\abbrstyledef{nolong-short-sc}] Like \abbrstyle{short-sc-nolong} but the inline full form displays -\meta{long} (\meta{short}). +\meta{long} (\meta{short}). The name is still obtained from +\cs{glsxtrshortnolongname} (similarly for the other +\texttt{nolong}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-short}\meta{modifier} styles, +unless indicated otherwise). \item[\abbrstyledef{short-sm-nolong}] Like \abbrstyle{short-nolong} but redefines \cs{glsabbrvfont} to @@ -4041,7 +4071,17 @@ but the inline full form displays \item[\abbrstyledef{short-nolong-desc}] Like the \abbrstyle{short-nolong} style, but the \gloskey{name} is set to -the full form and the \gloskey{description} must be supplied by the +the full form obtained by expanding +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortdescname] +\cs{glsxtrshortdescname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for the other +\texttt{short}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-nolong}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-desc} +styles, unless indicated otherwise.) This command is expanded when the entry is defined, so +\cs{protect} fragile and formatting commands and only redefine this +command before \cs{newabbreviation} (or \cs{newacronym}). + +The \gloskey{description} must be supplied by the user. You may prefer to use the \abbrstyle{short-nolong} style with the post-description hook set to display the long form and override the \gloskey{description} key. (See the sample file @@ -4077,8 +4117,18 @@ subsequent use of commands \ics{gls}. The short form may be accessed through commands like \ics{glsxtrshort}. The inline full form displays \meta{long} (\meta{short}). -The \gloskey{name} and \gloskey{sort} keys are set to the long form and the -\gloskey{description} must be provided by the user. The predefined +The \gloskey{sort} key are set to the long form. +The \gloskey{name} key is also set to the long form, but this is +done by expanding +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname] +\cs{glsxtrlongnoshortdescname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for the other +\texttt{long}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-noshort}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-desc} +styles, unless indicated otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before abbreviations +are defined, and any fragile or formatting commands within it need protecting. + +The \gloskey{description} must be provided by the user. The predefined glossary styles won't display the short form. You can use the post-description hook to automatically append the short form to the description. The inline full form will display \meta{long} @@ -4116,10 +4166,19 @@ New to version 1.04, like \abbrstyle{long-noshort-desc} but redefines \item[\abbrstyledef{long-noshort}] This style doesn't really make sense if you don't use the short form anywhere in the document, but is provided for completeness. -This is like the \abbrstyle{long-noshort-desc} style, but the \gloskey{name} -and \gloskey{sort} keys are -set to the short form and the \gloskey{description} is set to the -long form. +This is like the \abbrstyle{long-noshort-desc} style, but +the \gloskey{sort} key is set to the short form. The \gloskey{name} +key is also set to the short form, but this is done by expanding +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrlongnoshortname] +\cs{glsxtrlongnoshortname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{long}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-noshort}\meta{modifier} styles, +unless indicated otherwise.) +This command should only be redefined before abbreviations are +defined, and fragile or formatting commands should be protected. + +The \gloskey{description} is set to the long form. \item[\abbrstyledef{long}] A synonym for \abbrstyle{long-noshort} @@ -4167,11 +4226,22 @@ Other attributes may also be set, depending on the style. \begin{description} \item[\abbrstyledef{long-short}] On \gls{firstuse}, this style uses the format \meta{long} (\meta{short}). -The inline and display full forms are the same. The \gloskey{name} -and \gloskey{sort} keys are set to the short form. (The -\gloskey{name} key additionally includes the font command -\cs{glsabbrvfont}.) The -\gloskey{description} is set to the long form. The long and short +The inline and display full forms are the same. The + \gloskey{sort} key is set to the short form. The \gloskey{name} is +also set to the short form through +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrlongshortname] +\cs{glsxtrlongshortname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{long}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-short}\meta{modifier} styles, +unless indicated otherwise.) +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. + +The \gloskey{description} is set to the long form. The long and short forms are separated by \cs{glsxtrfullsep}. If you want to insert material within the parentheses (such as a~translation), try the \abbrstyle{long-short-user} style. @@ -4196,12 +4266,30 @@ use \ics{glsfirstlongemfont}. New to version 1.17, this style only shows the long form on first use and only shows the short form on subsequent use. The inline full form \cs{glsxtrfull} shows the long form -followed by the short form in parentheses. +followed by the short form in parentheses. The \gloskey{name} +field is obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtronlyname] +\cs{glsxtronlyname} +\end{definition} +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-only-short-only-desc}] New to version 1.17, this style is like \abbrstyle{long-only-short-only} but the user must supply the -description. +description. The \gloskey{name} +field is obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtronlydescname] +\cs{glsxtronlydescname} +\end{definition} +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-em-noshort-em-noreg}] New to version 1.17, this style is like @@ -4232,6 +4320,8 @@ where \meta{text} is the short form (for the a space using \cs{glsxtrfullsep} and then the parenthetical content (using \ics{glsxtrparen}). +The \gloskey{name} is obtained by expanding +\cs{glsxtrlongshortname} (see above). The \meta{text} argument includes the font formatting command, \cs{glsfirstabbrvfont}\marg{short} in the case of the \abbrstyle{long-short-user} style and @@ -4298,7 +4388,19 @@ For example: \renewcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortdescsort}{\the\glsshorttok} \end{verbatim} The \gloskey{description} must be supplied by the user. -The long and short forms are separated by \cs{glsxtrfullsep}. +The long and short forms are separated by \cs{glsxtrfullsep}. The \gloskey{name} +field is obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrlongshortdescname] +\cs{glsxtrlongshortdescname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{long}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-short}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-desc} +styles, unless indicated otherwise.) +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-short-sc-desc}] Like \abbrstyle{long-short-desc} but redefines \cs{glsabbrvfont} to @@ -4326,8 +4428,15 @@ doesn't set the \catattr{regular} attribute. New to version 1.04, this style is like a~cross between the \abbrstyle{long-short-desc} style and the \abbrstyle{long-short-user} style. The display and inline forms are -as for \abbrstyle{long-short-user} and the \gloskey{name} key is as -\abbrstyle{long-short-desc}. The \gloskey{description} key must be +as for \abbrstyle{long-short-user} and the \gloskey{name} key is +obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname] +\cs{glsxtrlongshortuserdescname} +\end{definition} +Again, this should only be redefined before \cs{newabbreviation} (or +\cs{newacronym}), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. + +The \gloskey{description} key must be supplied in the optional argument of \cs{newabbreviation} (or \cs{newacronym}). The \gloskey{sort} key is set to \meta{long} (\meta{short}) as per the \abbrstyle{long-short-desc} style. @@ -4350,6 +4459,20 @@ If you want to insert material within the parentheses (such as a~translation), try the \abbrstyle{short-long-user} style. +The \gloskey{name} field is obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortlongname] +\cs{glsxtrshortlongname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{short}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-long}\meta{modifier} styles, +unless indicated otherwise.) +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. + + \item[\abbrstyledef{short-sc-long}] Like \abbrstyle{short-long} but redefines \cs{glsabbrvfont} to use \ics{glsabbrvscfont}. @@ -4371,7 +4494,14 @@ New to version 1.04. This style is like the \abbrstyle{long-short-user} style but with the long and short forms switched. The parenthetical material is governed by the same command \ics{glsxtruserparen}, but the first argument supplied to it is -the long form instead of the short form. +the long form instead of the short form. The \gloskey{name} field is +obtained by expanding +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortlongname] +\cs{glsxtrshortlongname} +\end{definition} +Again, this should only be redefined before \cs{newabbreviation} (or +\cs{newacronym}) and commands that should be expanded need to be +protected. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-nolong-desc-noreg}] This style is like \abbrstyle{short-nolong-desc} but it doesn't @@ -4382,7 +4512,19 @@ On \gls{firstuse}, this style uses the format \meta{short} (\meta{long}). The inline and display full forms are the same. The \gloskey{name} is set to the full form. The \gloskey{description} must be supplied by the user. -The short and long forms are separated by \cs{glsxtrfullsep}. +The short and long forms are separated by \cs{glsxtrfullsep}. The \gloskey{name} +field is obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortlongdescname] +\cs{glsxtrshortlongdescname} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{short}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-long}\meta{modifier}\texttt{-desc} +styles, unless indicated otherwise.) +Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations +are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect +any commands that shouldn't be expanded. The long form can be +referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glslongtok} and the short form +can be referenced with \cs{the}\cs{glsshorttok}. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-sc-long-desc}] Like \abbrstyle{short-long-desc} but redefines \cs{glsabbrvfont} to @@ -4404,8 +4546,15 @@ use \ics{glsfirstlongemfont}. New to version 1.04, this style is like a~cross between the \abbrstyle{short-long-desc} style and the \abbrstyle{short-long-user} style. The display and inline forms are -as for \abbrstyle{short-long-user} and the \gloskey{name} key is as -\abbrstyle{short-long-desc}. The \gloskey{description} key must be +as for \abbrstyle{short-long-user}, but the \gloskey{name} key is +obtained from +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname] +\cs{glsxtrshortlonguserdescname} +\end{definition} +Again, this should only be redefined before \cs{newabbreviation} (or +\cs{newacronym}), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. + +The \gloskey{description} key must be supplied in the optional argument of \cs{newabbreviation} (or \cs{newacronym}). @@ -4418,7 +4567,16 @@ marker may be, if the \sty{hyperref} package is used). The inline full form uses the \meta{short} (\meta{long}) style. The \gloskey{name} is set to the short form. -The \gloskey{description} is set to the long form. +The \gloskey{description} is set to the long form. The +\gloskey{name} key is obtained by expanding +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrfootnotename] +\cs{glsxtrfootnotename} +\end{definition} +(Similarly for other +\texttt{short\meta{modifier}-\meta{modifier}footnote} styles, unless +indicated otherwise.) Again, this command should only be redefined +before \cs{newabbreviation} (or \cs{newacronym}), and fragile or +formatting commands should be protected from expansion. As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use: \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfirstlongfootnotefont] @@ -4522,12 +4680,14 @@ This style was introduced in version 1.12. It's like the material to after the link-text. This means that you don't have such a long hyperlink (which can cause problems for the DVI \LaTeX\ format) and it also means that the user supplied material can include a -hyperlink to another location. +hyperlink to another location. The \gloskey{name} key is obtained +from \cs{glsxtrshortlongname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-postlong-user-desc}] This style was introduced in version 1.12. It's like the above \abbrstyle{short-postlong-user} style but the \gloskey{description} -must be specified. +must be specified. The \gloskey{name} is obtained from +\cs{glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-postshort-user}] This style was introduced in version 1.12. It's like the above @@ -4538,7 +4698,8 @@ first and the short form is in the parenthetical material (as for \item[\abbrstyledef{long-postshort-user-desc}] This style was introduced in version 1.12. It's like the above \abbrstyle{long-postshort-user} style but the \gloskey{description} -must be specified. +must be specified. The \gloskey{name} is obtained from +\cs{glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}] This style (new to v1.17) is designed to work with the \catattr{markwords} @@ -4553,6 +4714,7 @@ locally redefines \ics{glsxtrwordsep} to a hyphen, which means that if the \catattr{markwords} attribute is set then the long form will become hyphenated. (If this attribute isn't set, there's no alteration to the way the long form is displayed.) +The \gloskey{name} key is obtained from \cs{glsxtrlongshortname}. Unlike the other \meta{long} (\meta{short}) type of styles, such as \abbrstyle{long-short}, this style @@ -4637,6 +4799,7 @@ on subsequent use. The short form can be accessed with \cs{glsxtrshort} but just uses the default abbreviation font. There's no regular version of this style as the regular form doesn't have the flexibility to deal with the hyphen switch. +The \gloskey{name} is obtained from \cs{glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-hyphen-noshort-noreg}] New to version 1.17, this style is like @@ -4648,7 +4811,8 @@ form. New to version 1.17. This is similar to \abbrstyle{long-hyphen-short-hyphen} but the user -supplies the description. +supplies the description. The \gloskey{name} is obtained from +\cs{glsxtrlongshortdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen}] @@ -4699,7 +4863,8 @@ if you want to ensure the full format. New to version 1.17. This is similar to \abbrstyle{long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen} but the -user supplies the description. +user supplies the description. The \gloskey{name} is obtained from +\cs{glsxtrlongshortdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-hyphen-long-hyphen}] @@ -4710,12 +4875,14 @@ is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. The full form is fo \cs{glsxtrshorthyphenlong}\marg{label}\marg{short}\marg{long}\marg{insert} \end{definition} which behaves in an analogous way to \cs{glsxtrlonghyphenshort}. +The \gloskey{name} is obtained from \cs{glsxtrshortlongname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc}] New to version 1.17. This is similar to \abbrstyle{short-hyphen-long-hyphen} but the user supplies the description. +The \gloskey{name} is obtained from \cs{glsxtrshortlongdescname}. \item[\abbrstyledef{short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen}] This style (new to v1.17) is like @@ -4732,6 +4899,7 @@ where \end{definition} is in the post-link hook. These commands behave in an analogous manner to those used with \abbrstyle{long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen}. +The \gloskey{name} is obtained from \cs{glsxtrshortlongname}. \begin{important} Don't use \cs{gls} in the \meta{insert} part for commands @@ -4747,7 +4915,8 @@ if you want to ensure the full format. New to version 1.17. This is similar to \abbrstyle{short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen} but the -user supplies the description. +user supplies the description. The \gloskey{name} is obtained from +\cs{glsxtrshortlongdescname}. \end{description} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf index ffe4a765f26..e29a9f88693 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf index d79fd689916..c43c2d47872 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf index f6235bad5ae..5f0a3c0af1a 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf index e35d1511543..3f1a6c8c0c9 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf index d369f0845de..0d6dafdee90 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf index 5d5339cc94c..6537dfe437d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf index 2ac6e310588..6a52db087af 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf index 68561d92796..c93648ff82e 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf index 1520c034c6b..ea177209bfe 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf index 7c945a7d2a5..304aade2501 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf index 052f8ca0fce..261c81c3ae0 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf index 054b4fe31a1..44c74a86092 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf index a2b277ac5b9..7cd161860e6 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf index f71dfcf6cb5..75b825c84ec 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf index d969678683f..85c0bc56745 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf index 8c8424a1a6f..a3b6f329784 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf index acd4493914e..8fdf5d555da 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf index 88d47e363c8..8b3760e2b3b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf index 79eaacd7fc9..1d6d70c1d48 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf index 151c37e494f..a653d472580 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf index 904ee124eef..2ba403dd32a 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf index e4e43656726..8228d1bea3b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf index 0cb72f32475..c4f44642a9c 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf index a7511af469e..fba1ab52ba9 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf index dbc8fd0ce67..dafb1cd4c35 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf index 4b8a28f1772..6c7ae1a9d8b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf index b4483abfee5..59eeaa0aa97 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf index cdf00d91eff..ccfb29f4bce 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf index d8bafefc5ed..c96d7876741 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf index c3c87d25940..fa4b3f4760c 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf index e55b92a7f45..5db475032f4 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf index 2ea86bf288e..8452d955d0a 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf index 6a25e747656..ee6fa6c7c34 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf index bbe10ca42e7..34b8fed224d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf index a437e63c915..7961a7094a5 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf index 84eee8369a2..8c45fb90d93 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex index 5c8b1f7fdb2..b74d5b0f85f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex @@ -5,6 +5,11 @@ \providecommand{\bibglsampersandchar}{\expandafter\@gobble\string\&} \providecommand{\bibglsunderscorechar}{\expandafter\@gobble\string\_} \providecommand{\bibglsusesee}[1]{\glsxtrusesee{#1}} +\providecommand{\bibglsusealias}[1]{% + \glsxtrifhasfield{alias}{#1}% + {\expandafter\glsseeformat\expandafter{\glscurrentfieldvalue}{}}% + {}% +} \providecommand{\bibglsuseseealso}[1]{\glsxtruseseealso{#1}} \providecommand{\bibglsdelimN}{\delimN} \providecommand{\bibglslastDelimN}{,~} @@ -18,6 +23,8 @@ \providecommand{\bibglsseealsosep}{, } +\providecommand{\bibglsaliassep}{, } + \providecommand{\bibglspostlocprefix}{\ } \appto\glossarypreamble{% \providecommand{\bibglslocprefix}[1]{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf index 6557cf7af1f..97a097e0fe2 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf index e101133c37f..ff430174da1 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf index 2587fc0a139..3fc7c0740a2 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf index 72999e4794e..1602a11a809 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf index d0f897ef859..a036e872445 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf index 2c54d15a9c9..fa78812c171 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf index 33e615d77d9..d13a02daabf 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf index 03477d264b7..4764efe7e94 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf index 99c1b5f6eb8..c2b9614ebf2 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf index 0e53b7bd4af..163d0f070b2 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx index dcef80670b4..e9151f3574c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx @@ -6,17 +6,17 @@ % -src "glossary-bookindex.sty\Z=>glossary-bookindex.sty" % -src "(example-glossaries-.+\.tex)\Z=>\1" % -src "(example-glossaries-.+\.bib)\Z=>\1" +% -author "Nicola Talbot" +% -section "chapter" % -codetitle "Main Package Code (\\styfmt{glossaries-extra.sty})" % -macrocode ".*\.tex" % -macrocode ".*\.bib" +% -doc "glossaries-extra-codedoc.tex" % -comment ".*\.tex" % -comment ".*\.bib" -% -section "chapter" -% -author "Nicola Talbot" -% -doc "glossaries-extra-codedoc.tex" % -setambles ".*\.bib=>\nopreamble\nopostamble" % glossaries-extra -% Created on 2017/11/14 20:50 +% Created on 2017/11/24 16:50 %\fi %\iffalse %<*package> @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ governed by the \gloskey{first} and \gloskey{firstplural} keys of \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} -\CheckSum{20211} +\CheckSum{20152} \newcommand*{\ifirstuse}{\iterm{first use}} \newcommand*{\firstuse}{\gls{firstuse}} @@ -166,13 +166,13 @@ governed by the \gloskey{first} and \gloskey{firstplural} keys of \raggedright } -\title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.24: +\title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.25: documented code} \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] Dickimaw Books\\ \url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/}} -\date{2017-11-14} +\date{2017-11-24} \begin{document} \DocInput{glossaries-extra.dtx} @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Dickimaw Books\\ %\section{Package Initialisation and Options} % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} % Requires \sty{xkeyval} to define package options. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -11326,6 +11326,10 @@ defined}{}% \let\@glsnumberformat\@glsxtr@defaultnumberformat \glsxtrdoautoindexname{#1}{indexname}% % \end{macrocode} +%Allow additional code regardless of category: +% \begin{macrocode} + \glsextrapostnamehook{#1}% +% \end{macrocode} % Allow categories to hook in here. %\changes{1.04}{2016-05-02}{added category check} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -11334,6 +11338,13 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsextrapostnamehook} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsextrapostnamehook}[1]{}% +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{macro}{\glsxtr@setaccessdisplay} %\changes{1.22}{2017-11-08}{new} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -12102,9 +12113,10 @@ defined}{}% % Provide a command for appending the description in parentheses on % first use, for the convenience of users wanting to add this to the % post link hook. +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{changed to use \cs{glsxtrparen}} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse}{% - \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\space(\glsaccessdesc{\glslabel})}{}% + \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\space\glsxtrparen{\glsaccessdesc{\glslabel}}}{}% } % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} @@ -12114,11 +12126,14 @@ defined}{}% % Provide a command for appending the symbol (if defined) in parentheses on % first use, for the convenience of users wanting to add this to the % post link hook. +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{changed to use \cs{glsxtrparen}} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse}{% \glsxtrifwasfirstuse {% - \ifglshassymbol{\glslabel}{\space(\glsaccesssymbol{\glslabel})}{}% + \ifglshassymbol{\glslabel}% + {\space\glsxtrparen{\glsaccesssymbol{\glslabel}}}% + {}% }% {}% } @@ -13851,6 +13866,15 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrlongshortname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\changes{1.17}{2017-08-09}{removed some inconsistencies in the abbreviation %styles} %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long-short} @@ -13858,7 +13882,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -13989,13 +14013,22 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrshortlongname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortlongname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{short-long} % Short form followed by long form in parenthesis on first use. % \begin{macrocode} \newabbreviationstyle{short-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -14151,13 +14184,22 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrfootnotename} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrfootnotename}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{footnote} % Short form followed by long form in footnote on first use. % \begin{macrocode} \newabbreviationstyle{footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% % \end{macrocode} @@ -14271,7 +14313,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -14381,6 +14423,15 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrshortnolongname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortnolongname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{short} % Provide a style that only displays the short form on first use, % but the short and long form can be displayed with the \qt{full} @@ -14392,7 +14443,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -14685,6 +14736,15 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}{% + \protect\glslongfont{\the\glslongtok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long-desc} % Provide a style that only displays the long form, % but the long and short form can be displayed with the \qt{full} @@ -14695,7 +14755,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -14814,6 +14874,15 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrlongnoshortname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongnoshortname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long} % It doesn't really make a great deal of sense to have a long-only % style that doesn't have a description (unless no glossary is @@ -14824,7 +14893,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -14916,7 +14985,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -15015,7 +15084,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -15116,7 +15185,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -15325,7 +15394,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -15519,7 +15588,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -15621,7 +15690,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -15767,7 +15836,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -15867,7 +15936,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -15968,7 +16037,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -16173,7 +16242,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -16362,7 +16431,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -16461,7 +16530,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -16603,7 +16672,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -16706,7 +16775,7 @@ defined}{}% %doesn't set the style. % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -16806,7 +16875,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -16912,7 +16981,7 @@ defined}{}% %doesn't set the style. % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\protect\glslongemfont{\the\glslongtok}},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -17012,7 +17081,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -17216,7 +17285,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -17315,7 +17384,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-em-noshort-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -17523,7 +17592,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-em-noshort-em-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -17638,7 +17707,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -17737,7 +17806,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -17916,7 +17985,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtruserparen{\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}% @@ -17986,7 +18055,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-postshort-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18068,6 +18137,17 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}{% + \protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% + \protect\glsxtruserparen + {\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}{\the\glslabeltok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long-postshort-user-desc} %\changes{1.12}{2017-02-03}{new} %Like \abbrstyle{long-postshort-user} but the user supplies the @@ -18076,9 +18156,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-postshort-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% - \protect\glsxtruserparen - {\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}{\the\glslabeltok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18119,7 +18197,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-postlong-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18201,6 +18279,18 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{abbrvstyle} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% + \protect\glsxtruserparen + {\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}}% + {\the\glslabeltok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{short-postlong-user-desc} %\changes{1.12}{2017-02-03}{new} %Like \abbrstyle{short-postlong-user} but leaves the user to specify @@ -18209,10 +18299,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-postlong-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% - \protect\glsxtruserparen - {\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}}% - {\the\glslabeltok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18251,7 +18338,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\glsxtrlongshortdescname}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}, sort={\glsxtrlongshortdescsort},% % \end{macrocode} %\changes{1.17}{2017-08-09}{corrected first forms} @@ -18292,7 +18379,7 @@ defined}{}% %doesn't set the style. % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -18360,7 +18447,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-long-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\glsxtrshortlongdescname}, + name={\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}, sort={\glsxtrshortlongdescsort},% % \end{macrocode} %\changes{1.17}{2017-08-09}{corrected first forms} @@ -18494,7 +18581,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -18616,7 +18703,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\expandonce\glsxtrorglong}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18705,7 +18792,7 @@ defined}{}% % %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long-hyphen-noshort-noreg} % It doesn't really make a great deal of sense to have a long-only -% style that doesn't have a descriptionnless no glossary is +% style that doesn't have a description (unless no glossary is % required), but the best course of % action here is to use the short form as the name and the long % form as the description. @@ -18713,7 +18800,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-noshort-noreg}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18806,7 +18893,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -18977,7 +19064,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-hyphen-long-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -19115,7 +19202,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshortpltok}},% @@ -19286,13 +19373,23 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtronlyname} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-24}{new} +% The default name format for this style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtronlyname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvonlyfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %\begin{abbrvstyle}{long-only-short-only} %\changes{1.17}{2017-08-09}{new} % \begin{macrocode} \newabbreviationstyle{long-only-short-only}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvonlyfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtronlyname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongonlyfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongonlyfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -20829,7 +20926,7 @@ defined}{}% % First identify package: % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} % Provide package options to automatically load required predefined % styles. The simplest method is to just test for the existence of @@ -22886,7 +22983,7 @@ defined}{}% %\section{Package Initialisation and Options} % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossary-bookindex}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossary-bookindex}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} %Load required packages. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -23054,6 +23151,14 @@ defined}{}% \newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexcolspread}{} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +% +%\begin{macro}{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv} +%\changes{1.25}{2017-11-14}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% %Define the style. % \begin{macrocode} \newglossarystyle{bookindex}{% @@ -23061,8 +23166,14 @@ defined}{}% \renewenvironment{theglossary}% {% \ifdefempty\glsxtrbookindexcolspread - {\begin{multicols}{\glsxtrbookindexcols}}% - {\begin{multicols}{\glsxtrbookindexcols}[\glsxtrbookindexcolspread]}% + {% + \expandafter\begin\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% + {\glsxtrbookindexcols}% + }% + {% + \expandafter\begin\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% + {\glsxtrbookindexcols}[\glsxtrbookindexcolspread]% + }% \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}% \setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 0.3pt}% \let\@glsxtr@bookindex@sep\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep @@ -23085,7 +23196,7 @@ defined}{}% % \end{macrocode} %End \env{multicols} environment. % \begin{macrocode} - \end{multicols}% + \expandafter\end\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% }% % \end{macrocode} %Use ragged right as columns are likely to be narrow and diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins index 679399bc50b..b675e9517f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% glossaries-extra.ins generated using makedtx version 1.2 2017/11/14 20:50 +% glossaries-extra.ins generated using makedtx version 1.2 2017/11/24 16:50 \input docstrip \preamble diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty index 17882481c14..21be266918d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] \newcommand*{\@glsxtr@loadstyles}{} \DeclareOption{all}{% \appto\@glsxtr@loadstyles{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty index aa4aeac9f32..b316e74887e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-extra}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] \RequirePackage{xkeyval} \RequirePackage{etoolbox} \@ifpackageloaded{glossaries} @@ -5525,8 +5525,10 @@ defined}{}% \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostnamehook}[1]{% \let\@glsnumberformat\@glsxtr@defaultnumberformat \glsxtrdoautoindexname{#1}{indexname}% + \glsextrapostnamehook{#1}% \csuse{glsxtrpostname\glscategory{#1}}% } +\newcommand*{\glsextrapostnamehook}[1]{}% \@ifpackageloaded{glossaries-accsupp} { \newcommand*{\glsxtr@setaccessdisplay}[1]{% @@ -5903,12 +5905,14 @@ defined}{}% }% } \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse}{% - \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\space(\glsaccessdesc{\glslabel})}{}% + \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\space\glsxtrparen{\glsaccessdesc{\glslabel}}}{}% } \newcommand*{\glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse}{% \glsxtrifwasfirstuse {% - \ifglshassymbol{\glslabel}{\space(\glsaccesssymbol{\glslabel})}{}% + \ifglshassymbol{\glslabel}% + {\space\glsxtrparen{\glsaccesssymbol{\glslabel}}}% + {}% }% {}% } @@ -6735,10 +6739,13 @@ defined}{}% } \newif\ifglsxtrinsertinside \glsxtrinsertinsidefalse +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{long-short}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -6817,10 +6824,13 @@ defined}{}% {% \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{long-short}% } +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortlongname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{short-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -6900,10 +6910,13 @@ defined}{}% \newcommand*{\glsfirstlongfootnotefont}[1]{\glslongfootnotefont{#1}}% \newcommand*{\glslongfootnotefont}[1]{\glslongdefaultfont{#1}}% \newcommand*{\glsxtrabbrvfootnote}[2]{\footnote{#2}} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrfootnotename}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -6977,7 +6990,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -7046,10 +7059,13 @@ defined}{}% }% } \letabbreviationstyle{short-postfootnote}{postfootnote} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortnolongname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{short}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -7241,10 +7257,13 @@ defined}{}% {% \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{nolong-short}% } +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}{% + \protect\glslongfont{\the\glslongtok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{long-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -7328,10 +7347,13 @@ defined}{}% {% \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{long-noshort-desc}% } +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongnoshortname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -7368,7 +7390,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -7442,7 +7464,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -7517,7 +7539,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -7666,7 +7688,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-sc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -7804,7 +7826,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -7878,7 +7900,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sc-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvscfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -7955,7 +7977,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -8029,7 +8051,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -8104,7 +8126,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -8253,7 +8275,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-sm}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -8391,7 +8413,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -8465,7 +8487,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-sm-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -8542,7 +8564,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -8616,7 +8638,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-em-short-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -8690,7 +8712,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-long}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -8765,7 +8787,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-long-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\protect\glslongemfont{\the\glslongtok}},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -8840,7 +8862,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortnolongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshortpltok}}, @@ -8989,7 +9011,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-noshort-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -9063,7 +9085,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-em-noshort-em}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -9214,7 +9236,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-em-noshort-em-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongtok}}, firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongemfont{\the\glslongpltok}}, @@ -9300,7 +9322,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-footnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -9374,7 +9396,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-em-postfootnote}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrfootnotename}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\the\glslongtok},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvemfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% @@ -9467,7 +9489,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtruserparen{\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}% @@ -9515,7 +9537,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-postshort-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -9581,12 +9603,15 @@ defined}{}% \glsxtruserparen{\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\glsaccessshortpl{##1}}}{##1}% }% } +\newcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}{% + \protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% + \protect\glsxtruserparen + {\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}{\the\glslabeltok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{long-postshort-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% - \protect\glsxtruserparen - {\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}{\the\glslabeltok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}, sort={\the\glslongtok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -9616,7 +9641,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-postlong-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -9682,13 +9707,16 @@ defined}{}% \glsxtruserparen{\glsfirstlonguserfont{\glsaccesslongpl{##1}}}{##1}% }% } +\newcommand*{\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% + \protect\glsxtruserparen + {\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}}% + {\the\glslabeltok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{short-postlong-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% - \protect\glsxtruserparen - {\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}}% - {\the\glslabeltok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -9718,7 +9746,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-short-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\glsxtrlongshortdescname}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname}, sort={\glsxtrlongshortdescsort},% first={\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtruserparen{\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}% @@ -9743,7 +9771,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-long-user}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, description={\protect\glslonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% @@ -9791,7 +9819,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-long-user-desc}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\glsxtrshortlongdescname}, + name={\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname}, sort={\glsxtrshortlongdescsort},% first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{\the\glsshorttok}% \protect\glsxtruserparen{\protect\glsfirstlonguserfont{\the\glslongtok}}% @@ -9842,7 +9870,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -9916,7 +9944,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\protect\glslonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname}, sort={\expandonce\glsxtrorglong}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -9985,7 +10013,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-noshort-noreg}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongnoshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -10028,7 +10056,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrlongshortname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% @@ -10145,7 +10173,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-hyphen-long-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}% \protect\glsxtrfullsep{\the\glslabeltok}% @@ -10229,7 +10257,7 @@ defined}{}% \newabbreviationstyle{short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtrshortlongname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshorttok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{\the\glsshortpltok}},% @@ -10338,10 +10366,13 @@ defined}{}% \newcommand*{\glslongonlyfont}{\glslongdefaultfont}% \newcommand*{\glsfirstlongonlyfont}{\glslongonlyfont}% \newcommand*{\glsxtronlysuffix}{\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix} +\newcommand*{\glsxtronlyname}{% + \protect\glsabbrvonlyfont{\the\glsshorttok}% +} \newabbreviationstyle{long-only-short-only}% {% \renewcommand*{\CustomAbbreviationFields}{% - name={\protect\glsabbrvonlyfont{\the\glsshorttok}}, + name={\glsxtronlyname}, sort={\the\glsshorttok}, first={\protect\glsfirstlongonlyfont{\the\glslongtok}},% firstplural={\protect\glsfirstlongonlyfont{\the\glslongpltok}},% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty index c3004903605..883a46c8dc4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossary-bookindex}[2017/11/14 v1.24 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossary-bookindex}[2017/11/24 v1.25 (NLCT)] \RequirePackage{multicol} \RequirePackage{glossary-tree} \newcommand{\glsxtrbookindexcols}{2} @@ -79,13 +79,20 @@ \newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexbookmark}[2]{} } \newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexcolspread}{} +\newcommand*{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols} \newglossarystyle{bookindex}{% \setglossarystyle{index}% \renewenvironment{theglossary}% {% \ifdefempty\glsxtrbookindexcolspread - {\begin{multicols}{\glsxtrbookindexcols}}% - {\begin{multicols}{\glsxtrbookindexcols}[\glsxtrbookindexcolspread]}% + {% + \expandafter\begin\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% + {\glsxtrbookindexcols}% + }% + {% + \expandafter\begin\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% + {\glsxtrbookindexcols}[\glsxtrbookindexcolspread]% + }% \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}% \setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 0.3pt}% \let\@glsxtr@bookindex@sep\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep @@ -102,7 +109,7 @@ \@glsxtr@bookindex@subsubatendgroup \@glsxtr@bookindex@subatendgroup \@glsxtr@bookindex@atendgroup - \end{multicols}% + \expandafter\end\expandafter{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}% }% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\raggedright}% \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{% -- cgit v1.2.3